Dictionary
A-Z Listing
abs
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
abs A
- See Also:
opposite
The operation abs
produces the following results when applied to atoms
of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | corresponding integer |
integer | absolute value |
real | absolute value |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
If the argument is the largest negative integer for the computer, the result is the corresponding positive real number because the corresponding positive integer is too large for representation as an integer.
abs l -2 3.5 `a "abc ??error
1 2 3.5 ?A ?A ?error
The operation abs
can be used to convert a boolean value to an
integer. Its primary use is in the numeric domains, where it is used to
give a positive number measuring the size of a number.
Equations
abs abs A = abs A
abs opposite A = abs A
accumulate
- Class:
reduction transformer - Usage:
ACCUMULATE f A
- See Also:
reduce
The transformer accumulate
is similar to the concept of scan in APL.
It computes the partial reductions of the initial lists of the items of
A
, using reduce f
(a right-to-left reduction) to compute each
partial result. (A reductive operation is one which when applied to an
array having a number of items returns a single result.)
In the example below, the initial lists of Z
are:
[13, 13 39, 13 39 92, 13 39 92 45];
and the right-to-left reduction of f
on Z
is equivalent to:
[f 13, 13 f 39, 13 f (39 f 92), 13 f (39 f ( 92 f 45))]
Z := 13 39 92 45 ;
ACCUMULATE pass Z
+--+-----+----------+---------------+
|13|13 39|+--+-----+|+--+----------+|
| | ||13|39 92|||13|+--+-----+||
| | |+--+-----+|| ||39|92 45|||
| | | || |+--+-----+||
| | | |+--+----------+|
+--+-----+----------+---------------+
The first example shows that accumulate builds the result values with a right-to-left reduction.
ACCUMULATE max Z
13 39 92 92
ACCUMULATE min Z
13 13 13 13
ACCUMULATE sum (count 10)
1 3 6 10 15 21 28 36 45 55
ACCUMULATE minus (count 10)
1 -1 2 -2 3 -3 4 -4 5 -5
Useful applications of accumulate
include the accumulate sum
transform used to compute a running sum, and the accumulate minus
transform which gives an alternating sum.
ACCUMULATE or oollooll
oollllll
S := ' black and white'
black and white
B := not (S match ` )
oolllllolllolllll
ACCUMULATE or B sublist S
black and white
The accumulate or
transform produces a bitstring that can be used with
sublist
to drop leading items that fail to meet a predicate.
Definition
ACCUMULATE IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
heads IS OPERATION A {
count tally A EACHLEFT take list A};
EACH REDUCE f heads A }
Equations
shape ACCUMULATE f A = shape A
ACCUMULATE f solitary A = solitary A
ACCUMULATE f single A = single A
ACCUMULATE f Null = Null
ACCUMULATE f[A,B,C]=[A,A f B,A f(B f C)]
across
- Class:
recursion transformer - Usage:
ACROSS [endf, parta, joinf] A
- See Also:
recur, down
ACROSS is a general recursion transformer for traversing the length of
an array. It has three operation arguments: endf
is applied to the end
argument before starting to build the result, parta
computes the left
value from the argument, which is stacked, and joinf
combines the left
and right values as the recursion unwinds.
ACROSS [ 0 first, pass, plus ] 3 4 5 6
18
reshape [ shape, ACROSS [pass, pass, CONVERSE append ] ] 2 15 12 4
4 12 15 2
Definition
ACROSS IS TRANSFORMER endf parta joinf OPERATION A {
A := list A;
Res := endf void last A;
FOR I WITH reverse tell tally A DO
Res := parta A@I joinf Res
ENDFOR }
Equations
ACROSS [endf, parta, joinf] A = RECUR [empty, endf, parta first, joinf, rest ] list A
sum A = ACROSS [ 0 first, pass, plus ] A
reverse A = reshape [ shape, ACROSS [pass, pass, CONVERSE append ] ] A
EACH f A = reshape [ shape, ACROSS [ Null first, f, hitch ] ] A
action
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
definition, expression sequence, external declaration, comment
An action is the construct that is entered in the interactive loop of the Q’Nial interpreter or accepted as an input unit within the operation loaddefs:
action ::= definition-sequence
| expression-sequence
| external-declaration
| remark
definition-sequence ::= definition
{ ; definition } [ ; ]
remark ::= # < any text >
If an action is a definition-sequence, its definitions are installed in the global environment.
If an action is an expression-sequence, it is executed and a value is returned. The value returned by an expression-sequence is displayed on the screen unless it is the fault ?noexpr.
An external-declaration assigns a role to a name in the global environment so that the name can be used in other definitions before it is completely specified.
A remark is an input to the Q’Nial interpreter that is not processed. It begins with a line that has the symbol # as the first non-blank character in the line. In direct input at the top level loop, a remark ends at the end of the line unless a backslash symbol ( \ ) is used to extend the line. In a definition file, a remark ends at the first blank line. A remark cannot appear within a definition or expression-sequence.
address
An address is an integer or a list of integers describing the location of an item in an array. An address uses 0-origin counting, i.e. the first position in a list is at address 0. All the addresses of an array can be stored in an array of the same rectangular structure as the array itself. Such an array is called the grid of an array. Consider the following example:
GRID OF THE ARRAY ARRAY
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ +---+---+---+---+---+---+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+| |499|434|122|770|733|890|
||0|0|||0|1|||0|2|||0|3|||0|4|||0|5|| +---+---+---+---+---+---+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+| |660|160| 32|808|240|584|
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ +---+---+---+---+---+---+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+| |473|235|164|496|808|966|
||1|0|||1|1|||1|2|||1|3|||1|4|||1|5|| +---+---+---+---+---+---+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+| |156|205| 34|576|236|454|
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ +---+---+---+---+---+---+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|
||2|0|||2|1|||2|2|||2|3|||2|4|||2|5||
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|
||3|0|||3|1|||3|2|||3|3|||3|4|||3|5||
|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|+-+-+|
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
The array on the right is a 4 by 6 table of numbers. It has 24 items arranged along two directions of length 4 and 6 respectively. The address of 496 is [2,3].
The addresses of a list
are integers: 0, 1, etc. For convenience, in
situations where an address of a list is expected, a solitary integer is
treated as an integer.
The address of a single
is the empty list Null
.
allbools
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
allbools A
- See Also:
allints, allreals, allchars, allnumeric
The operation allbools
tests whether or not A
is a nonempty array of
boolean items. It returns true
if A
is not empty and all the items
of A
are boolean atoms, false
otherwise.
allbools lool
l
allbools 1 0 1
o
allbools Null
o
Definition
allbools IS OPERATION A { and EACH isboolean A and not empty A }
allchars
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
allchars A
- See Also:
allbools, allints, allreals, allnumeric
The operation allchars
tests whether or not A
is a nonempty array of
character items. It returns true
if A
is not empty and all the items
of A
are character atoms, false
otherwise.
allchars 'apple pie'
l
allchars "today
o
allchars Null
o
Definition
allchars IS OPERATION A { and EACH ischar A and not empty A }
allin
- Class:
set-like operation - Properties:
binary, predicate - Usage:
A allin B
allin A B
- See Also:
in, like, notin
The operation allin
tests whether or not all the items of array A
are also items of array B
. The result is true
if the test holds and
false
if it does not.
3 5 7 allin count 10
l
'ae' allin 'where are you?'
l
'where' allin 'hear'
o
The items of A
and B
are compared for exact equality, including
type. The items being compared may be atoms or they may be any other
array.
Definition
allin IS OPERATION A B { and ( A EACHLEFT in B ) }
Equation
A allin B = (list A) allin (list B)
allints
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
allints A
- See Also:
allbools, allreals, allchars, allnumeric
The operation allints
tests whether or not A
is a nonempty array of
integer items. It returns true
if A
is not empty and all the items
of A
are integer atoms, false
otherwise.
allints lool
o
allints 1 0 25
l
allints Null
o
Definition
allints IS OPERATION A { and EACH isinteger A and not empty A }
allnumeric
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
allnumeric A
- See Also:
allints, allreals, allbools, numeric
The operation allnumeric
tests whether or not A
is a nonempty array
with all atoms of the same numeric type. It returns true
if A
is not
empty and all items are boolean atoms, or all are integer atoms or all
are real atoms, false
otherwise.
allnumeric 3.5 -2.97
l
allnumeric l 45 3.78
o
allnumeric Null
o
Definition
allnumeric IS OPERATION A { allbools A or allints A or allreals A }
allreals
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
allreals A
- See Also:
allbools, allints, allchars, allnumeric
The operation allreals
tests whether or not A
is a nonempty array of
real items. It returns true
if A
is not empty and all the items of
A
are real atoms, false
otherwise.
allreals 2 2.5 47.9
o
allreals 2.5 -7.8 27.3
l
allreals Null
o
Definition
allreals IS OPERATION A { and EACH isreal A and not empty A }
and
- Class:
logic operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
and A
A and B
- See Also:
or, not
The operation and
applied to a boolean array A
does the boolean
product of its items. If all items of A
are true
, the result is
true
; otherwise it is false
. In binary form and implements the
and-connective of logic.
If A
is a simple array and has a non-boolean item, the result is the
logical fault ?L
. The operation extends to non-simple arrays by the
multi pervasive mechanism.
l and l
l
and llllloll
o
lloo and lolo
looo
And
is a reductive operation in that it reduces an array of booleans
to a single boolean. If its argument is a pair of bitstrings or a list
of bitstrings, and
is applied to bits in corresponding positions of
each item of the argument producing a bitstring of the same length as
one of the items of its argument.
Equations
A and B = B and A
not and A =f= or EACH not A
and Null = True
append
- Class:
construction operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A append B
append A B
- See Also:
hitch, link
The operation append
attaches B
to the end of the list of items of
A
. It returns a list of length one greater than the tally
of A
.
(2 3 4) append (5 6 7)
+-+-+-+-----+
|2|3|4|5 6 7|
+-+-+-+-----+
append '' 'Wow'
+---+
|Wow|
+---+
The first example shows list (5 6 7) appended to list (2 3 4). The
second example shows that if an array is appended to an empty list, the
result is the solitary of the second argument. If append
is applied to
an array that is not a pair, a fault is returned.
Definition
append IS OPERATION A B { A link solitary B }
Equations
A append B = ( list A ) append B
Null append A = solitary A
A append B = list (A append B)
appendfile
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
appendfile Filename A
- See Also:
putfile, getfile
The operation appendfile
writes a list of character arrays A
to the
end of the file named Filename
, using one line of the file for each
row in the items of A
. If the file does not exist, it is created by
the operation. The file must not be open.
Appendfile
is similar to operation putfile
except that putfile
overwrites an existing file. Getfile
reads a file containing text
records.
putfile "Mailing ['1','2','3'];
appendfile "Mailing ['Mr. Jones','123 Main St','New York NY 12345'];
getfile "Mailing
+-+-+-+---------+-----------+-----------------+
|1|2|3|Mr. Jones|123 Main St|New York NY 12345|
+-+-+-+---------+-----------+-----------------+
Definition
appendfile IS OPERATION Filename A {
Fnum := open Filename "a ;
ITERATE (Fnum writefile) (link EACH rows A) ;
close Fnum ; }
apply
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
Op apply A
apply Op A
- See Also:
eval, execute, value, cast
The operation apply
carries out the application of the operation
represented by the array Op
to array A
. Op
may be a phrase or
string that names a predefined or user-defined operation or it may be
the cast
of an operation expression.
If the operation is represented by a phrase or string giving its name,
the name is sought in the environment where apply
is being used.
apply "second (3 4 5)
4
The operation to be applied may also be represented by the parse tree
or cast
for the operation expression. If the cast is a name, it is
sought in the environment where the cast appears. In the following
example, !first
is the cast of the operation first
.
(!first apply 3 4 5)
3
apply !(first rest) (3 4 5)
4
As seen in the second example, an operation expression does not have to
be named in order to be used with apply
. The entire first example is
enclosed in parentheses to avoid conflict with the notation for
executing a host command.
arccos
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
arccos A
- See Also:
cos, cosh, arcsin, pi
The operation arccos
is the inverse of cos
in the numeric domain. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six
types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | arccosine of the corresponding real |
integer | arccosine of the corresponding real |
real | the angle B in radians such that cos B = A, if A is in the range -1 to 1; otherwise the fault ?arccos |
character | fault ?arccos |
phrase | fault ?arccos |
fault | argument A |
arccos l -2 0.35
0. ?arccos 1.21323
arccos `a "abc ??error
?arccos ?arccos ?error
Definition
arccos IS OPERATION A ( Pi / 2.0 - arcsin A )
Equation
cos arccos cos A = cos A (within roundoff error)
arcsin
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
arcsin A
- See Also:
sin, sinh, arctan, pi
The operation arcsin
is the inverse of sin
in the numeric domain. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six
types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | arcsine of the corresponding real |
integer | arcsine of the corresponding real |
real | the angle B in radians such that sin B = A, if A is in the range -1 to 1; otherwise, the fault ?arcsin |
character | fault ?arcsin |
phrase | fault ?arcsin |
fault | argument A |
arcsin l -2 0.35
1.5708 ?arcsin 0.357571
arcsin `a "abc ??error
?arcsin ?arcsin ?error
arcsin l 1 .5
1.5708 1.5708 0.523599
Equation
sin arcsin sin A = sin A (within roundoff error)
arctan
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
arctan A
- See Also:
tan, tanh, arcsin, pi
The operation arctan
is the inverse of tan
in the numeric domain. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | arctangent of the corresponding real |
integer | arctangent of the corresponding real |
real | angle B in radians where tan B = A |
character | fault ?arctan |
phrase | fault ?arctan |
fault | argument A |
arctan l -2 0.35
0.785398 -1.10715 0.336675
arctan `a "abc ??error
?arctan ?arctan ?error
arctan 2. l 1 .5
1.10715 0.785398 0.785398 0.463648
Equation
tan arctan tan A = tan A (within roundoff error)
argument
An argument is an array value supplied to an operation. All operations in Nial take a single array as the argument, but binary operations expect that argument to be a pair. When an operation is used in infix syntax, then the two array values on the left and right are combined into a pair to be supplied as the argument to the operation.
The argument to an operation-form is treated specially. If the
operation-form has only one formal parameter then the argument is
assigned to the parameter. If it has two or more formal parameters, then
the argument is checked to see if it has the same number of items as
there are parameters. If so, the items are assigned to the parameters.
If not, the result is the fault ?op_parameter
.
array
- Class:
concept - See Also:
item, address, dimensions
The data objects of Nial are nested rectangular arrays. Atomic data objects such as numbers and characters are included within this description by virtue of an atom being considered as a self-containing array object with no dimensions.
Atomic Arrays
There are six types of atoms in Nial. They are boolean
, integer, real,
character, phrase and fault
. The first three are numeric types and
are used for arithmetic operations. The last three are literal types
and are used for text and symbol manipulation. All six types of atoms
are used in comparisons.
Rectangularity Structure
An array is a collection of data objects having its items held at locations in a rectangular structure. The items are viewed as being at locations that are positioned relative to a set of directions at right angles to each other. The items may be arranged along zero, one, two or more directions. For example, the following array is a 4 by 6 table of numbers. It has 24 items arranged along two directions of length 4 and 6 respectively.
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|499|434|122|770|733|890|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|660| 32|808| 24| 5|473|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|499|434|122|770|733|890|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|660| 32|808| 24| 5|473|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
The items of an array are themselves arrays. Thus, an array can have an arbitrarily deep nesting structure.
assign
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
Nm assign A
assign Nm A
- See Also:
update, place, value, assign expression
The operation assign
assigns the value of A
to the variable named by
Nm
. Nm
may be a phrase or string (e.g. "X
or 'X'
), in which case
the named variable is sought in the current environment; or it may be
the cast of a name (e.g. !X
), in which case it is sought in the
environment in which it was cast. If the variable is found, its value is
replaced by the array A
. Otherwise, a variable with that name is
created in the global environment and given A
as its value.
Any phrase may be used as a variable name with the operation assign
.
Thus, it is possible to assign a value to names which are invalid
identifiers. The associated value can be retrieved using the operation
value
. The result of the operation is A
.
assign "X (2 3 4)
2 3 4
(!Var assign 2 3 4)
2 3 4
In the first example, the variable X
is assigned the list 2 3 4. If
this is done in an environment where X
is a local variable, the local
variable is updated. If X
does not exist, it is created in the global
environment.
In the second example, a variable Var
must exist in the environment
where the cast is done. The cast can be formed in a more global
environment and passed into an operation as a parameter (This technique
is called by-variable parameter passing).
assign expression
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
variable, expression, indexing, assign
assign-expression ::=
{ variable }+ := expression
| indexed-variable := expression
An assign-expression assigns an array value to one or more variables at the time of evaluation of the assign expression. The semantics of an assign expression is interpreted in two stages: when the expression is analyzed (parsed) and when it is executed.
During the parse of the assign-expression appearing in a block, each name on the variable list is sought in the local environment. If the name exists in the local environment, the assignment affects the local association. If a name does not exist in the local environment and no reference has been made to a nonlocal variable with the same name, a local variable is created in the block. An assign-expression parsed in the global environment creates a global variable if a variable with that name does not already exist.
When an assign expression is executed, the expression on the right of the assignment symbol ( := ) is evaluated. If the variable list on the left has only one name, the value of the expression is assigned to that variable. That is, the value is associated with that name.
If the variable list has several names, the items of the value are assigned to the variables in the order in which they appear. If the number of items does not match the number of variables, the fault ?assignment is returned as the value of the assign-expression. Otherwise, the value of the assign-expression is the value of the expression on the right.
When an indexed-variable is used on the left in an assign-expression, the parts of the array associated with the variable at the locations specified by the index are replaced by the values of the expression on the right.
If the index expression for an indexed-variable assignment specifies a number of locations (at-all or slice indexing), there are two cases: if the value on the right is a single, the item of the single is placed in each location; otherwise, the value on the right must have the same number of items as the index expression indicates and the corresponding locations are updated with the items of the array value.
atlas
atlas ::= [ operation-expression { , operation-expression } ]
An atlas is an operation made up of a list of component operations.
The result of applying an atlas is a list of the same length as the
atlas. Each operation in the atlas is applied in turn to the argument
resulting in an array value that becomes the item of the result list in
the corresponding position. An atlas is used by the transformers FORK,
INNER
and TEAM
.
atomic
- Class:
structure testing operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
atomic A
- See Also:
simple, leaf
The operation atomic
tests whether or not its argument is an atom. It
returns true
if it is and false
if it is not.
atomic 3.5
l
atomic "hello
l
atomic 'hello'
o
The examples illustrate that a number and a phrase are atoms and that a string is not an atom.
An atom is a primitive concept in array theory and Nial. Atoms are distinguished from other arrays by the property that they are self nesting. The definition of atomic is based on this property.
Definition
atomic IS OPERATION A { first A = A }
Equations
atomic A <==> single A equal A
and EACH atomic A = simple A
axes
- Class:
measurement operation - Usage:
axes A
- See Also:
valence, tell
The operation axes
generates a list of axis numbers for the array A
counting from zero.
axes tell 3 4 5
0 1 2
Definition
axes IS OPERATION A { tell valence A }
Equation
tally axes A = tally shape A
binary
- Class:
operation property - Usage:
A f B
f A B
- See Also:
binary pervasive
An operation is said to binary
if it must have exactly two items in
its argument. Many of the built-in operations of Nial are binary. They
can be used in both an infix and prefix manner. If a binary operation
f
is used in infix syntax then the arguments on each side of f
are
treated as the two items of its argument.
3 reshape 5
In prefix usage, f
can precede a single array with two items, or an
explicit pair formed with strand notation or bracket-comma notation.
X := 3 5;
reshape X
5 5 5
reshape 3 5
5 5 5
reshape [3,5]
5 5 5
binary pervasive
- Class:
operation property - Usage:
A f B
f A B
- See Also:
binary, unary pervasive, multi pervasive, pervasive, eachboth, pack
Each operation f
in this class maps a pair of atoms to an atom.
A binary pervasive operation maps two arrays having identical structure to one with the same structure, mapping each pair of corresponding atoms by the function’s behaviour on pairs of atoms.
All of the binary operations of arithmetic and logic are binary pervasive.
If a binary pervasive operation is applied to a pair of arrays that do
not have the same shape, the effect is to build a conformable pair by
replicating an atom or solitary item of the pair to the shape of the
other item. If both items are of unequal shape and if both items are
made up of more than one item, the fault ?conform
is returned. The
replication of an argument with one item provides binary pervasive
operations with a scalar extension capability. For example,
3 4 5 6 - 5 = (3 4 5 6 - 5 5 5 5)
l
If a binary pervasive operation is applied to an array that is not a pair, a fault is returned.
The following table lists the binary pervasive operations.
Operation | Function |
---|---|
divide | division of numbers |
gt | greater than comparison |
gte | greater than or equal comparison |
lt | less than comparison |
lte | less than or equal comparison |
match | equality of atoms without type coercion |
mate | equality of atoms with type coercion |
minus | subtraction of numbers |
mod | remainder on division of integers |
plus | addition of numbers |
quotient | quotient on division of integers |
times | multiplication of numbers divide division of numbers |
Equations
A f B = A EACHBOTH f B
A f B = EACH f (A pack B)
shape (A f B) = shape pack A B
blend
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A blend B
blend A B
- See Also:
split, mix, rank
The operation blend
combines the top two levels of an array B
into a
single level blending the axes of the second level of B
into the
combined level according to the axis numbers given in A
. The items of
B
must be of the same shape.
If the array B
is equivalent to A split C
for some array C
, the
result of A blend B
is C
.
The tally of A
is the valence of an item of B
. The items of A
indicate where the axes of the items of B
are placed in the shape of
the result.
C := (2 4 3 reshape count 24) ;
B := 2 0 split C
+----+----+----+-----+
|1 13|4 16|7 19|10 22|
|2 14|5 17|8 20|11 23|
|3 15|6 18|9 21|12 24|
+----+----+----+-----+
C := 2 0 blend B
1 2 3 13 14 15
4 5 6 16 17 18
7 8 9 19 20 21
10 11 12 22 23 24
In the example, B
is a list of four tables of shape 3 2 created by a
2 0 split
. The result of 2 0 blend B
is the array of valence 3 that
is the second argument to split
.
Equations
SORT <= list I = axes A and not empty A ==> I blend (I split A) = A
equal EACH shape A and not empty A ==> (valence A+axes first A) blend A = mix A
A blend B =f= [Null,A] PARTITION first B
block
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
local environment, scope of a variable, nested definition
block ::=
{ [ LOCAL { identifier-sequence }+ ; ]
[ NONLOCAL { identifier-sequence }+ ; ]
[ definition-sequence ; ]
expression-sequence }
A block is a scope-creating mechanism that permits an expression-sequence to be created so that it has local definitions and variables which are visible only inside the block. A block may appear as a primary-expression or as the body of an operation-form.
A local environment is a collection of associations that are known within a limited section of program text. These limited sections are formed by blocks, operation-forms and transformer-forms. A name that has a local association in one of these forms is said to have local scope.
If the definition appears within a block, the association is made in the local environment. Otherwise, the association is made in the global environment and assigns a role to the name as representing that kind of expression.
If a block is used as a primary-expression, the local environment created by a block is determined by the block itself. If it is the body of an operation-form, the local environment includes the formal parameter names of the operation-form as variables.
Local and Nonlocal Declaration
The identifiers included in the local and nonlocal declarations are declared to be variables. Both forms of declarations are optional, but if both are given, local declarations must be made first. If the block is the body of a globally defined operation-form or expression, a nonlocal declaration effectively declares its variables as global ones.
A block delimits a local environment. It allows new uses of names which do not interfere with uses of those names outside the block. For example, within a block, a predefined operation name can be redefined and used for a different purpose. Only the reserved words of Q’Nial cannot be reused in this fashion.
Definitions that appear within the block have local scope. That is, the definitions can be referenced only in the body of the block. Variables assigned within the block may or may not have local scope, depending on the appearance of a local and/or a nonlocal declaration. If there is no declaration, all assigned variables have local scope. Declaring some variables as local does not change the effect on undeclared variables that are used on the left of assignment. They are automatically localized.
If a nonlocal declaration is used, an assigned name that is on the nonlocal list is sought in surrounding scopes. If the name is not found, a variable is created in the global environment.
bracket-comma notation
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
strand notation
A list may be constructed directly by using bracket-comma notation.
In this notation, the items of a list are separated by commas and the
list is bounded by square brackets. If an item is omitted before or
after a comma, then the fault value ?noexpr
is used for the value of
the missing item. The notation denotes the Null
if their are no items,
and a solitary if there is only one item.
[2,3 4,5]
+-+---+-+
|2|3 4|5|
+-+---+-+
[,4 5]
+-------+---+
|?noexpr|4 5|
+-------+---+
[] = Null
l
['hello world']
+-----------+
|hello world|
+-----------+
[3,[4,5,6],7]
+-+-----+-+
|3|4 5 6|7|
+-+-----+-+
break
The execution of Break
causes the interpreter to interrupt normal
execution in an expression sequence and to display the current
callstack. It then prompts for input with the prompt -->
followed by
the default command in brackets. The visible environment is that of the
expression in which the break occurs. Thus, it is possible to examine
the values of local variables in break mode.
At a break you can type any expression to inspect the value of a
variable or to see a portion of its value. The operation see
can also
be used to view any of the definitions in the environment.
The debugging capability allows one to step forward in expression
sequences using commands step
, stepin, next or toend
to control
whether you step into or over other definitions or to the end of a loop
or a definition. The command resume
ends the break and normal
execution is restarted.
foo is op A { Break; A }
foo 3
-------------------------------------------------------------
Break debug loop: enter debug commands, expressions or
type: resume to exit debug loop
<Return> executes the indicated debug command
current call stack :
foo
-------------------------------------------------------------
?.. A
-->[stepv]
In the example, the operation foo
has a Break
which is executed when
foo
is applied to 3. If Return
is pressed at the prompt the
expression A
is evaluated and 3 is displayed followed by another
prompt.
breakin
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
breakin Defname [Mode]
- See Also:
break, debugging, breaklist
The operation breakin
installs a break point prior to the first
executable expression in a definition named by the string or phrase
Defname
. The named definition must be an expression or an operation
form. The effect is that when the definition is executed a break
interrupt occurs prior to the execution of the first expression in the
expression sequence in the body of the definition.
The optional argument Mode
is provided to set the internal flag
explicitly. If it is omitted, the internal flag value is toggled. All
breakin flags are initially false
. The value of the breakin flag is
retained if the definition is replaced by a loaddefs
so that editing a
definition and reloading it does not change its breakin status. However,
if definitions are reloaded using a restart
then the breakin status is
set to false
.
The operation returns the previous setting. If the result of breakin
is assigned to a variable, the previous setting can be restored later.
The names of definitions that have breakin set can be viewed by the
expression Breaklist
.
library"labeltab
see "labeltable
labeltable IS OPERATION Corner Rowlabel
Columnlabel Table {
% Combine the corner label with the column
labels for first line;
Firstrow := Corner hitch Columnlabel;
% Hitch the row labels to the rows of
the table;
Labeledrows := Rowlabel EACHBOTH hitch
rows Table;
% Hitch the first row of labels to the labeled
rows and mix them;
mix (Firstrow hitch Labeledrows) }
X gets count 3
1 2 3
# execute labeltable without break;
labeltable "TIMES X X (X OUTER times X)
TIMES 1 2 3
1 1 2 3
2 2 4 6
3 3 6 9
# set breakin and execute again
breakin "labeltable
o
labeltable "TIMES X X (X OUTER times X)
-------------------------------------------------------------
Break debug loop: enter debug commands, expressions or
type: resume to exit debug loop
<Return> executes the indicated debug command
current call stack :
labeltable
-------------------------------------------------------------
?.. Firstrow := Corner hitch Columnlabel
-->[stepv] TIMES 1 2 3
?.. % Hitch the row labels to the rows of the table
-->[stepv] resume
TIMES 1 2 3
1 1 2 3
2 2 4 6
3 3 6 9
To clear all breaks use:
EACH breakin Breaklist
breaklist
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Breaklist
- See Also:
break, breakin, debugging
The execution of Breaklist
prints out a list of the definition names
for which the breakin flag has been set.
Its main use is to assist in clearing the breaks as debugging proceeds.
Breaklist
labeltable
To clear all breaks use:
EACH breakin Breaklist
bycols
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
BYCOLS f A
- See Also:
rank, partition
The transformer BYCOLS
applies an operation f
to the columns of a
table A
, where f
is an operation that maps lists to lists.
setformat '%5.3f';
BYCOLS (SORT <=) (5 6 reshape random 30)
0.726 0.009 0.210 0.385 0.123 0.119
0.851 0.448 0.384 0.476 0.193 0.384
0.880 0.449 0.536 0.603 0.455 0.498
0.882 0.729 0.631 0.819 0.639 0.521
0.911 0.893 0.810 0.961 0.940 0.672
The example generates a random table and then sorts each column.
Definition
BYCOLS IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A { transpose (1 RANK f transpose A) }
Equation
shape f A = shape A ==> shape BYCOLS f A = shape A
bye
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Bye
- See Also:
save
The expression Bye
is used to terminate a session of Q’Nial and to
return to the host environment. The current workspace is not saved.
bykey
- Class:
applicative transformer - Usage:
K BYKEY f A
BYKEY f K A
- See Also:
each
The transformer BYKEY
applies an operation f
to lists gathered from
A
, where each list is made up of items of A
that have the same value
in the corresponding position in K
. The result is a list with as many
items as there are unique items in K
.
Str := 'a stitch in time saves nine';
cull Str
a stichnmev
Str BYKEY tally Str
2 5 3 2 4 1 1 3 1 3 1
Keys := 3 5 3 7 2 5 4 2 1 3 4;
Data := 23.1 14.2 13.5 18.9 22. 98. 3.5 28.7 19.3 16.5 43.2;
Keys BYKEY sum Data
53.1 112.2 18.9 50.7 46.7 19.3
average IS OP A { sum A / tally A }
Keys BYKEY average Data
17.7 56.1 18.9 25.35 23.35 19.3
In the first example BYKEY tally
is used to count the frequency of the
letters in the string Str
, giving the counts in the order of cull
Str
. In the remaining examples, the values in Data
corresponding to
equal items in Keys
are added and averaged in the two uses of BYKEY
.
Definition
BYKEY IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION K A {
Keys gets cull A;
IF simple Keys THEN
Patterns := Keys EACHLEFT match A;
ELSE
Patterns := Keys EACHLEFT EACHRIGHT = A;
ENDIF;
EACH f (Patterns EACHLEFT sublist B) }
Equations
tally BYKEY f K A = tally cull K
valence BYKEY f K A = 1
byrows
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
BYROWS f A
- See Also:
bycols, partition
The transformer BYROWS
applies an operation f
to the rows of a table
A
, where f
is an operation that maps lists to lists.
BYROWS reverse (5 6 reshape count 30)
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7
18 17 16 15 14 13
24 23 22 21 20 19
30 29 28 27 26 25
The example reverses the rows of the generated table.
Definition
BYROWS IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A { 1 RANK f A }
Equation
shape f A = shape A ==> shape BYROWS f A = shape A
by-variable
One use of the operation assign
is to mimic a by-variable form of
parameter passing in place of Nial’s by-value form. The result depends
on what kind of name is provided, a phrase or a cast. If the name is
provided as a phrase, the variable that is selected is determined by
assign
when it does the assignment by looking first in the local
environment and then in the surrounding ones. If the name is provided as
a cast, the variable selected is the one that exists at the point where
the cast is formed. Thus, by-variable parameter passing is achieved by
using the cast of the variable as an argument in the call. In the body
of the operation the formal parameter is assigned using assign
and
evaluated using value
.
foo is op A Nm {
B := A + value Nm;
Nm assign (B + sum count 5); }
X := 100;
foo 1000 "X;
X
1115
callstack
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Callstack
- See Also:
break, debugging
The expression Callstack
displays the sequence of active definition
calls at the point it is invoked. It is usually used in conjunction with
Break
. Callstack
can be used to see the execution path by which the
computation reached the current state while computation is suspended
during a break.
canonical
There is a canonical way of displaying program text in Nial. This is
done automatically by the routines descan
and deparse
used by see
.
The canonical form sets the case of all identifiers used in Nial program
text according to their role in order to assist visual parsing of Nial
text. The following table summarizes the rules:
Role | Case rule |
---|---|
Variable | first letter upper case, the rest lower case |
Expression | first letter upper case, the rest lower case |
Operation | all lower case |
Transformer | all upper case |
Reserved Word | all upper case |
Definition
canonical IS link descan deparse parse scan
cart
- Class:
construction operation - Usage:
cart A
A cart B
- See Also:
outer, tell
The operation cart
corresponds to the cartesian product of set theory.
Its purpose is to form all possible combinations of the items of its
argument and return them in a structured result having as many axes as
the sum of the number of axes of the items of argument.
2 3 4 cart 5 6
+---+---+
|2 5|2 6|
+---+---+
|3 5|3 6|
+---+---+
|4 5|4 6|
+---+---+
In the example above, the cart of a triple with a pair yields a table of shape 3 2 of pairs.
cart ['abc', 4 2 reshape count 8]
+---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+
|a 1|a 2| |b 1|b 2| |c 1|c 2|
+---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+
|a 3|a 4| |b 3|b 4| |c 3|c 4|
+---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+
|a 5|a 6| |b 5|b 6| |c 5|c 6|
+---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+
|a 7|a 8| |b 7|b 8| |c 7|c 8|
+---+---+ +---+---+ +---+---+
In the above example, the shape of the result is 3 4 2, getting an axis of length 3 from the first item and axes of length 4 and 2 from the second.
Equations
shape cart A = link EACH shape A
valence cart A = sum EACH valence A
tally cart A = product EACH tally A
equal EACH shape cart A = True
A OUTER pair B = A cart B
cart link A = EACH link cart EACH cart A
cart EACH EACH f A = EACH EACH f cart A
cart single A = EACH single A
simple A ==> cart A = single A
cart Null = single Null
empty A ==> cart A = single A
or EACH empty A ==> empty cart A
not empty A and not empty cart A ==> shape first cart A = shape A
not empty A and not empty cart A ==> first cart A = EACH first A
isshape A ==> tell A = cart EACH tell A
case-expr
- Class:
control structure - Usage:
CASE expression FROM C1: ES1 END ... Cn: ESn END ELSE ESx ENDCASE
- See Also:
if-expr, fork
The expression following case is evaluated. If the result matches one of
the constants, C1 … Cn, the corresponding expression sequence is
executed. If the result does not match any constant, the expression
sequence following else is executed. Alternates may be matched on with
the label A1 | A2
, that is, placing the vertical bar between both
constants you wish to match on.
Example:
Month := 4 ;
CASE Month FROM
1: Month_name := "January; END
2: Month_name := "February; END
3 | 4: Month_name := "March/April; END
ELSE Month_name := phrase 'May through December';
ENDCASE ;
Mname
March/April
cast
- Class:
syntax
A cast
is an array expression that denotes an internal representation
of a valid fragment of Q’Nial program text:
cast ::= ! identifier
| ! ( expression-sequence)
| ! ( operation-expression )
| ! ( transformer-expression )
The use of the exclamation symbol !
before an identifier causes Q’Nial
to select the internal representation for the identifier rather than the
value of the array associated with the identifier. Its use before a
parenthesized program fragment selects the internal representation of
the program fragment.
The major use of casts is in conjunction with the operations assign and apply. These operations mimic the Q’Nial constructs for assignment to a variable and application of an operation to an array. Casts permit passing an argument to an operation by variable name rather than by value. They also permit evaluation of a program fragment that has been stored in its internal form using the operation eval rather than requiring the use of the operation execute on the corresponding program text stored as a string.
Salary := 90000.
A gets 'Salary > 100000.' ;
Rule1 := execute A
o
Rule1 := eval !A
o
The details of the internal representation is not specified as part of the Nial language.
The cast notation !Name
is used to denote the parse tree that
represents the name. At the top level loop, parentheses must be included
around the use of the cast notation, e.g. (!Name)
, to avoid ambiguity
with the use of !
to indicate a host command.
The cast, because it is analyzed in the context in which it appears, refers to a variable or definition in a static way.
Q’Nial contains operations that mimic the underlying meaning of variables, expressions and operations in Q’Nial. The operations use strings, phrases or casts to represent the name of the object under consideration (except that see and getdef do not take casts).
Operation | Action |
---|---|
value A | Return the value of a variable named by string, phrase or cast A . |
A assign B | Assign the array B to the variable named by string, phrase or cast A ; return B . |
A apply B | Apply the operation named by string, phrase or cast A to array B ; return the result of the operation. |
getdef A | Return the parse tree associated with the definition named by string or phrase A . |
see A | Display the definition named by the string or phrase A . |
update P A B | Put array B at address A in the variable named by the phrase, string or cast P ; return the new value of P . |
updateall P A B | Put items of B at addresses A in the variable named by the phrase, string or cast P ; return the new value of the variable named by P . |
deepupdate P A B | Put array B at path A in variable named by the string, phrase or cast P ; return new value of the variable named by P . |
catch
- Class:
control flow transformer - Usage:
CATCH f A
- See Also:
throw
The transformer CATCH
is used to regain control when the called
argument function f
applied to the argument A
terminates its
computation early by the application of the control flow function
throw
, either directly by f
, or by a function that is called during
the execution of f
.
If f
executes without applying a throw
the result of CATCH f A
is
the value computed at the completion of f
. Otherwise it is the value
of the argument to throw
in the function that executes the throw.
The CATCH-throw mechanism was added in Version 7 of Q’Nial to provide a dynamic mechanism for changing the flow of control when an exceptional situation is encountered.
catenate
- Class:
construction operation - Usage:
I catenate A
catenate I A
- See Also:
link, laminate
The operation catenate
joins the items of A
along axis I
. The
items of A
must conform in all other axes.
1 catenate (tell 2 3) (count 2 5)
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|1 1|1 2|1 3|1 4|1 5|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|2 1|2 2|2 3|2 4|2 5|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
The example joins two tables along the rows. Each table has two rows.
Definition
catenate IS OPERATION I A {
% "push down" I axis of items of A;
B := EACH ( I split ) A ;
IF equal EACH shape B THEN
I blend EACH link pack B
ELSE
fault '?conform error in catenate'
ENDIF }
ceiling
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
ceiling A
- See Also:
floor, mod, quotient
The operation ceiling produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | corresponding integer |
integer | argument |
real | next higher integer or the fault ?A, if the result is outside the range of integers |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
Examples
ceiling l -2 3.5
1 -2 4
ceiling `a "abc ??error
?A ?A ?error
ceiling 3.5 -4.6 7.0 25.3e20
4 -4 7 ?A
Definition
ceiling IS OPERATION A {
opposite floor opposite A }
char
- Class:
conversion operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
char N
- See Also:
charrep, ischar, isinteger, isstring
The operation char
is used to convert an integer in the range 0 to 255
to the character that has the integer as its internal representation.
The result is system dependent.
char 66
B
char 66 67 68 69
BCDE
The major purpose of char
is to create special characters for a
specific system. For example, the characters that control cursor motion
differ from one terminal to another. Programs using char
may not be
portable.
Equations
N in tell 256 ==> charrep char N = N
ischar C ==> char charrep C = C
charrep
- Class:
conversion operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
charrep C
- See Also:
char, isinteger, ischar, isstring
The operation charrep
is used to convert a character to its internal
representation as an integer. This operation is system dependent.
charrep `A
65
charrep 'hello'
104 101 108 108 111
The major purpose of charrep
is to permit determination of special
characters for a specific system. For example, the characters that
control cursor motion differ from one terminal to another.
Programs using charrep may not be portable.
Equations
N in tell 256 ==> charrep char N = N
ischar C ==> char charrep C = C
choose
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
I choose A
choose I A
- See Also:
pick, take, takeright, reach
The operation choose
is used to select a subarray from array A
specified by the array of addresses I
. The result is an array of the
same shape as I
with items chosen from A
. If an item of I
is not
an address of A
, the corresponding position in the result is the fault
?address
.
The operation choose
is related to the at all
notation V#I
, which
selects items from the array associated with the variable V
. The
differences are that choose
may select from an array that has not been
assigned to a variable and that it handles out-of-range in a different
manner.
3 1 0 1 3 4 choose 'range'
garage
The following example shows that the valence
of the array of addresses
can be higher than that of the array from which the selection is made.
I gets (2 4 reshape tell 8)
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
I choose 'some words as a string'
some
wor
Definition
choose IS OPERATION I A { I EACHLEFT pick A }
Equations
shape (I choose A) = shape I
J choose (I choose A) = (J choose I) choose A
tell shape A choose A = A
(list I) choose A = list (I choose A)
(EACH list I) choose A = I choose A
I allin grid A ==> EACH f (I choose A) = I choose EACH f A
clear workspace
- Class:
concept - See Also:
standard definitions, save, load, symbols
Q’Nial organizes the data and code objects available for use into a logical structure called a workspace . It consists of a symbol table to hold associations between names and the predefined and user defined objects, a heap to store data and parse trees, a stack used to hold values temporarily during execution, and an atom table for uniquely storing phrases and faults.
When Q’Nial is invoked for interactive use it starts the session with a clear workspace unless a specific saved workspace is requested. The clear workspace is created by an initialization process.
clearprofile
- Class:
profiling expression - Usage:
Clearprofile
- See Also:
profile, setprofile, profiletable, profiletree, profiling
The expression Clearprofile
is used to clear the internal data
structures that are used in the gathering of profiling statistics. It
should be called when one profiling session has been completed and
profile
has been called, before starting another one.
A detailed explanation of the profiling mechanism is given in the help entry on profiling.
Example
Clearprofile
close
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
close Fd
- See Also:
open, filestatus
The operation close
is used to close a file previously opened with the
open
operation. The argument is the file designator, an integer
returned previously by open
for that file.
The result of close
is the fault ?noexpr
or a fault message
indicating an error.
Fd := open "foo "w
3
close Fd
close Fd
?file is not open
In the examples above, the first use of close
was successful. The
second attempt to close the file resulted in the fault message.
cols
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
cols A
- See Also:
rows, split, raise, rank
The operation cols
rearranges the axes of a table of shape M
by N
to form a list of length N
of the columns of length M
of the table.
Cols
is generalized to arrays of all valences as follows: if A
is a
list or a single, the result is single A
; if A
has valence three or
higher, the result is an array of valence one less than the valence of
A
with the second last axis pushed down.
A := 3 4 reshape count 12
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
cols A
+-----+------+------+------+
|1 5 9|2 6 10|3 7 11|4 8 12|
+-----+------+------+------+
If only column I
of a table is needed, it can be selected by I pick
cols A
or by A|[,I]
using the at slice
indexing notation. The
second way is more efficient for large arrays because it avoids
restructuring the array. If a table A
has no columns, cols A
results
in the empty list Null
.
Definition
cols IS OPERATION A {
IF valence A = 0 THEN single A
ELSE
valence A - 2 max 0 split A
ENDIF }
Equations
valence A = 2 and not empty A ==> cols A = pack rows A
valence A = 2 and not empty A ==> cols A = rows transpose A
valence A = 2 and not empty A ==> mix cols A = transpose A
comment
comment ::=
% <any text excluding a semicolon> ;
remark ::= # < any text >
A comment is a brief section of text included in a program fragment
to assist readability. Comments may be placed anywhere in a block before
or after declarations, definitions or expressions. Their purpose is to
provide an explanation of the program fragment for the programmer who
may be required to modify the program at a later date. The value of a
comment as an expression is the ?noexpr
fault. Comments are retained
when a definition is translated into internal form and they appear in
its creation in the canonical form used by the operations see and
defedit.
A remark is an input to the Q’Nial interpreter that is not processed. It begins with a line that has the symbol # as the first non-blank character in the line. In direct input at the top level loop, a remark ends at the end of the line unless a backslash symbol ( \ ) is used to extend the line. In a definition file, a remark ends at the first blank line. A remark cannot appear within a definition or expression-sequence.
conform
- Class:
concept - See Also:
pack, binary pervasive, multi pervasive
The operation pack is used in evaluating binary pervasive and multi pervasive operations. Its task is to interchange the top two levels of the argument to such operations if the items of the argument conform . For the binary case there are two items; they conform if the items have the same shape, or if one or both items have only one item. In the latter case, the item with only one item is replicated to the shape of the other item.
For the multi pervasive case, all the items that do not have only one item must be of the same shape and all the items with one item are replicated to that shape.
pack [2 3 4,10 11 12]
+----+----+----+
|2 10|3 11|4 12|
+----+----+----+
pack [2 3,10 11 12]
?conform
pack [3 4 5,3,10 11 12,[4]]
+--------+--------+--------+
|3 3 10 4|4 3 11 4|5 3 12 4|
+--------+--------+--------+
pack [tell 4 5,count 4 5]
+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||0 0|1 1|||0 1|1 2|||0 2|1 3|||0 3|1 4|||0 4|1 5||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||1 0|2 1|||1 1|2 2|||1 2|2 3|||1 3|2 4|||1 4|2 5||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||2 0|3 1|||2 1|3 2|||2 2|3 3|||2 3|3 4|||2 4|3 5||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||3 0|4 1|||3 1|4 2|||3 2|4 3|||3 3|4 4|||3 4|4 5||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+
Definition
conform IS OP A {
equal EACH shape
(not (EACH tally A match 1) sublist A) }
content
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
content A
- See Also:
link, list, in, solitary
The operation content
returns the list of atoms of A
. The effect of
content is to remove all structure from an array, returning a list of
the atoms in a depth first, row-major order. The effect on an atom is to
produce the solitary of the atom.
A := (2 3) (4 5 (6 7))
+---+---------+
|2 3|+-+-+---+|
| ||4|5|6 7||
| |+-+-+---+|
+---+---------+
content A
2 3 4 5 6 7
Definition
content IS OPERATION A {
IF atomic A THEN
list A
ELSE
link EACH content A
ENDIF }
Equations
content A = list content A
content A = content list A
content A = link EACH content A
converse
- Class:
applicative transformer - Usage:
A CONVERSE f B
CONVERSE f A B
- See Also:
fold
The transformer CONVERSE
is used with a binary operation f
and
applies f
to the pair formed by reversing the arguments of CONVERSE
f
.
at IS CONVERSE pick
'abcde' at 2
c
holds IS CONVERSE in
count 20 holds 5
l
In the above examples, at
and holds
are defined in terms of pick
and in
, respectively. The first example shows that 'abcde' at 2
gives the result expected for 2 pick 'abcde'
. The second example shows
that count 20 holds 5
gives the same result as 5 in (count 20)
.
Thus, at
and holds
do the same work as pick
and in
; the former
operations simply use their arguments in the reverse order.
Definition
CONVERSE IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A B {
B f A }
Equations
A CONVERSE CONVERSE f B = A f B
A EACHLEFT f B = B EACHRIGHT CONVERSE f A
cos
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
cos A
- See Also:
sin, cosh, pi
The operation cos
implements the cosine function of mathematics. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | cosine of the corresponding real |
integer | cosine of the corresponding real |
real | cosine of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?cos |
phrase | fault ?cos |
fault | argument A |
cos l -1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
0.54030 0.54030 0.87758 ?cos ?cos ?error
Equation
cos opposite A = cos A
cosh
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
cosh A
- See Also:
sinh, cos, pi
The operation cosh
implements the hyperbolic cosine function of
mathematics. It produces the following results when applied to atoms of
the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | hyperbolic cosine of the corresponding real |
integer | hyperbolic cosine of the corresponding real |
real | hyperbolic cosine of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?cosh |
phrase | fault ?cosh |
fault | argument A |
cosh l -1 0.5
1.54308 1.54308 1.12763
cosh `a "abc ??error
?cosh ?cosh ?error
Equation
cosh opposite A = cosh A
count
- Class:
array generation operation - Usage:
count N
- See Also:
tell
The operation count
generates a list of integers starting at 1 and
going up to and including N
. It differs from tell
by counting from 1
instead of from 0.
count 5
1 2 3 4 5
.1 times count 5
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
The first example shows count
generating the sequence of integers from
1 to 5. The second example shows how count
can be used to generate a
sequence of five real numbers with an interval of .1 between each
number.
count 2 3
+---+---+---+
|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+
|2 1|2 2|2 3|
+---+---+---+
The third example shows how count
generalizes to other arguments in
the same manner as the operation tell
.
Definition
count IS OPERATION A { 1 + tell A }
Equations
isshape A ==> shape count A = A
isshape A ==> count A = cart EACH count A
cull
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
cull A
- See Also:
except, diverse, bykey
The operation cull
returns a list whose items are those of A
with
duplicates removed. The order of the items is maintained.
cull 3 5 4 3 5 2 4
3 5 4 2
cull 'a few letters with duplicates'
a fewltrsihdupc
Definition
cull IS OPERATION A {
grid A EACHLEFT in (A EACHLEFT find A) sublist A }
Equations
cull A = list cull A
diverse A <==> cull A = list A
sortup cull A = cull sortup A
Pragmatics
The operation cull
executes faster when a large array has been sorted,
hence if the ordering of the result is unimportant it is better to use
sortup
to order the array prior to applying cull
.
curried operation
- Class:
concept - See Also:
apply, operation composition
A curried-operation
is an operation in which the left item of a
two-item argument is combined with a given operation to form an
operation expression. Examples are: 1+
and 3 reshape
.
A curried operation can be named or grouped in parentheses as an argument to a transformer.
incr IS 1+
EACH (5 take) Lines
In general, the syntax of a curried operation is:
curried-operation ::= simple-expression simple-operation
The result of applying a curried-operation is determined by applying the simple-operation to the pair formed from the simple-expression and the argument to the curried-operation. Thus,
(1+) 5
6
is interpreted as
+ (1 5)
6
cut
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
B cut A
cut B A
- See Also:
cutall
The operation cut
converts an array A
into a list of items formed
from the items of A
according to the bitstring B
. The list of items
is divided where true values occur in the corresponding positions in the
bitstring B
. The items of A
where the divisions occur are not
included in the items of the result and any empty segments are not
included.
A := 'The boy stood on the burning deck' ;
` match A cut A
+---+---+-----+--+---+-------+----+
|The|boy|stood|on|the|burning|deck|
+---+---+-----+--+---+-------+----+
B := 'Formula 1: 3,5,7,,,9';
`, match B cut B
+------------+-+-+-+
|Formula 1: 3|5|7|9|
+------------+-+-+-+
EACH equal tell 4 4 cut tell 4 4
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
|+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+|
||0 1|0 2|0 3|1 0|||1 2|1 3|2 0|2 1|||2 3|3 0|3 1|3 2||
|+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+|
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+
Cut
can be used to cut a string into a list of substrings. In the
first example, the string is cut at blank characters. Several adjacent
blanks are treated as one blank character. In the second example, the
cut is done where commas occur. The third example shows that the items
of A
do not have to be atoms.
Definition
cut IS OPERATION B A {
C := EACH rest (B cutall A);
not EACH empty C sublist C }
Equations
B cut A = (shape A reshape B) cut A
list (B cut A) = B cut A
B cut list A = B cut A
cutall
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
B cutall A
cutall B A
- See Also:
cut
The operation cutall
converts an array A
into a list of items formed
from the items of A
according to the bitstring B
. The list of items
is divided where true values occur in the corresponding positions in the
bitstring B
. The items where the divisions occur are kept as the first
item of each group.
A := 'The boy stood on the deck' ;
` match A cutall A
+---+----+------+---+----+-----+
|The| boy| stood| on| the| deck|
+---+----+------+---+----+-----+
B := 'Formula 1: 3,5,7,,,9';
`, match B cutall B
+------------+--+--+-+-+--+
|Formula 1: 3|,5|,7|,|,|,9|
+------------+--+--+-+-+--+
EACH equal tell 4 4 cutall tell 4 4
+---------------------+---------------------+---------------------+-----+
|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+|
||0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|1 0|||1 1|1 2|1 3|2 0|2 1|||2 2|2 3|3 0|3 1|3 2|||3 3||
|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+---+---+|+---+|
+---------------------+---------------------+---------------------+-----+
Equations
tally (B cutall A) = sum (shape A reshape B)
B cutall A = (shape A reshape B) cutall A
list (B cutall A) = B cutall A
B cutall list A = B cutall A
debugging
Debugging Definitions
The Q’Nial system provides an optional debugging facility that aids interactive debugging of definitions. It is active by default, but can be turned off for running production applications. See the detailed documentation for the various versions on how to turn off debugging.
The debugging system is based on the idea of placing breaks in the code and stepping through the program code in a number of different ways. Due to constraints in the way Q’Nial is implemented, debugging is always done in the context of an expression sequence. A break point occurs either before the execution of the expression sequence in a definition, or at an explicit break expression within an expression sequence. There is also a watch mechanism that executes a defined action whenever the value of a variable changes, and an ability monitor all use of user defined objects and of the predefined operations.
Defining a Break Point
There are two ways to cause a break in a Nial definition: by using the
expression Break
in an expression sequence, or by using the operation
breakin
to set a break on entry to the operation. The following table
summarizes the break related
primitives:
Expression | Action |
---|---|
Break | Suspend evaluation of the expression and pass control to an evaluation loop in the environment at the point of the break. Variables accessible at that point can be displayed. This loop recognizes a number of commands described below. |
breakin Nm [M] | Set or rest an internal break flag for the definition of Nm . If the boolean value M is omitted, the flag is toggled. If set, a break occurs before the execution of the expression sequence of the definition. The Nm must be the name of a defined expression or a defined operation using the operation form style of operation expression. |
Breaklist | Display the list of names of definitions with break flag set. |
deepplace
- Class:
insertion operation - Usage:
B P deepplace A
deepplace (B P) A
- See Also:
place, placeall, deepupdate
The operation deepplace
returns an array the same as A
except that
the array at path P
is replaced by B
. It is the insertion operation
corresponding to the selection operation reach
and generalizes the
operation place
from addresses to paths.
A1 := 1 2 (3 4 (5 6 (7 (8 9))))
+-+-+-------------------+
|1|2|+-+-+-------------+|
| | ||3|4|+-+-+-------+||
| | || | ||5|6|+-+---+|||
| | || | || | ||7|8 9||||
| | || | || | |+-+---+|||
| | || | |+-+-+-------+||
| | |+-+-+-------------+|
+-+-+-------------------+
A1 := "M (2 2 2 0) deepplace A1
+-+-+-------------------+
|1|2|+-+-+-------------+|
| | ||3|4|+-+-+-------+||
| | || | ||5|6|+-+---+|||
| | || | || | ||M|8 9||||
| | || | || | |+-+---+|||
| | || | |+-+-+-------+||
| | |+-+-+-------------+|
+-+-+-------------------+
The array 7 is replaced with M
. Since the result of the insertion is
assigned to variable A1, the insertion of M is retained.
Definition
deepplace IS OPERATION C A {
B Path := C ;
IF empty Path THEN
B
ELSE
I := first Path ;
((B (rest Path)) deepplace (I pick A)) I place A
ENDIF }
Equations
Path a valid path into A ==> ( Path reach A ) Path deepplace A = A
B Null deepplace A = B, I in grid A ==> B \[I] deepplace A = B I place A
deepupdate
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
deepupdate Nm P A
- See Also:
update, updateall, deepplace
The operation deepupdate
provides the semantics of the Nm@@P := A
form of assignment expression. Nm
must be an existing variable
represented by a string, phrase or a cast; P
is the path of addresses
to the location to be updated; and A
is the array to be placed in the
variable.
Array1 := (1 2(3 4 (5 6 (7 (8 9)))))
+-+-+-------------------+
|1|2|+-+-+-------------+|
| | ||3|4|+-+-+-------+||
| | || | ||5|6|+-+---+|||
| | || | || | ||7|8 9||||
| | || | || | |+-+---+|||
| | || | |+-+-+-------+||
| | |+-+-+-------------+|
+-+-+-------------------+
deepupdate "Array1 (2 2 2 1 0) "Tom
+-+-+---------------------+
|1|2|+-+-+---------------+|
| | ||3|4|+-+-+---------+||
| | || | ||5|6|+-+-----+|||
| | || | || | ||7|Tom 9||||
| | || | || | |+-+-----+|||
| | || | |+-+-+---------+||
| | |+-+-+---------------+|
+-+-+---------------------+
The major purpose of deepupdate
is to allow a selective update with a
path on a global variable without forcing a copy. By passing the name of
the variable to the operation that is doing the update, rather than its
value, no sharing of the internal data is made and hence the update can
be made “in place”.
definition
- Class:
concept - See Also:
expression, operation, transformer
A definition in Nial is a syntactic construct that names a program fragment. The syntax is one of the three forms:
<name> IS <array expression>
<name> IS <operation expression>
<name> IS <transformer expression>
A definition is used to associate a name (identifier) with a program fragment that is an array expression, an operation expression or a transformer expression. If the definition appears within a block, the association is made in the local environment. Otherwise, the association is made in the global environment and assigns a role to the name as representing that kind of expression.
If the program fragment is syntactically correct, the name is associated with the program fragment in the environment and no result is given. If a syntax error is detected in the analysis of the program fragment, an explanatory fault message is returned and the name association is not made.
If the name being associated in a definition is already in use, the new definition must be for a construct of the same role and the earlier definition is replaced. The use of a defined name always refers to its most recent definition.
deparse
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
deparse Pt
- See Also:
descan, parse, scan, see
The operation deparse
is used to convert a parse tree representation
of a Nial definition or program fragment into a token stream which can
be converted into text corresponding to the Nial definition. The
argument to deparse
must be either a cast or the result of parse
or
getdef
.
deparse !(Pi * cos 0.5)
99 1 ( 2 Pi 2 * 2 cos 18 0.5 1 )
The principal use of deparse
is in displaying Nial definitions. It is
used in the definition of defedit
and see
.
The token stream returned by deparse
also includes indicators to
identify where new lines are to begin and to control indentation. The
tokens corresponding to identifiers are given in the canonical form,
indicating what role each token plays.
The result of deparse
is implementation dependent and should be viewed
as an internal representation provided as an interface to editing. It is
subject to change as Q’Nial evolves.
Equations
Pt a parse tree ==> parse deparse Pt = Pt
Ts a token stream ==> parse deparse parse Ts = parse Ts
depth
- Class:
measurement operation - Usage:
tally A
- See Also:
tally, down
The operation depth
returns an integer indicating the number of levels
of nesting of the array. This is called the depth of the array. The
depth of an atom is 0. The depth of a simple nonempty is 1. In general,
the depth of an array is 1 plus the maximum of the depths of the items.
depth "abc
0
depth 3 4 5
1
depth 1 (2 3) (4 5 6)
2
depth [2, [3, 4, [5],8],24]
3
Definition
depth IS OPERATION A
{ IF atomic A THEN
0
ELSE
1 + (max EACH depth A)
ENDIF
}
Equations
depth Null = max Null
tally depth A = 1
depth A = FORK [atomic, 0 first, 1 plus max EACH depth] A
descan
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
descan Ts
- See Also:
scan, deparse, see, canonical
The operation descan
converts a token stream to a list of strings that
represents the program fragment given by the token stream. The input to
descan
must be a token stream produced by scan
or deparse
or an
equivalent list of tokens.
descan scan 'A + 32'
+-------+
|A + 32 |
+-------+
descan deparse !(Pi * cos 0.5)
+-----------------+
|( Pi * cos 0.5 ) |
+-----------------+
The principal use of descan
is in displaying Nial definitions. It is
used to define defedit
and see
. The argument to descan
may also
include tokens indicating the beginning of new lines and controlling
indentation used to display a structured definition.
Equations
S a string of Nial text ==> scan link descan scan S = scan S
S a string of Nial text ==> canonical canonical S = canonical S
S a string of Nial text ==> execute canonical S = execute S
diagram
The operation diagram
computes a character table that gives the fully
boxed picture of A
with the decoration of the atoms determined by the
current setting of the decor switch. An array is displayed as a frame
with cells for each item. It is arranged in two dimensions, using
groupings of table frames to picture arrays of higher dimension. Each
cell is large enough to hold the diagram of the corresponding item of
A
.
The diagram of an atom is a picture that indicates its value. The diagram of a non-atomic single has an “o” in its upper left corner.
Diagram
returns the display given by the operation picture
when in
diagram mode of display.
The decor or nodecor mode switch controls the display of atoms. With decor set, it gives a picture that distinguishes all atoms.
set "decor;
A := diagram (2 3 2 reshape 3 'abc' (2 1 reshape count 3) "apple 8.5
(3 4));
set "nodecor; A
+---+----------+ +---+----------+
| 3|+--+--+--+| | 3|+--+--+--+|
| ||`a|`b|`c|| | ||`a|`b|`c||
| |+--+--+--+| | |+--+--+--+|
+---+----------+ +---+----------+
|+-+|"apple | |+-+|"apple |
||1|| | ||1|| |
|+-+| | |+-+| |
||2|| | ||2|| |
|+-+| | |+-+| |
+---+----------+ +---+----------+
|8.5|+-+-+ | |8.5|+-+-+ |
| ||3|4| | | ||3|4| |
| |+-+-+ | | |+-+-+ |
+---+----------+ +---+----------+
The display of the result of a picture
operation, such as diagram
,
makes sense when it itself is pictured in sketch-nodecor mode. In other
modes, the characters making up the table would be boxed and/or
decorated.
Definition
diagram IS OPERATION A {
Old_setting := set "diagram ;
Result := picture A ;
set Old_setting ;
Result }
dimensions
The number of axes of an array is referred to as its dimensionality. In array theory terminology the dimensionality is called the valence of the array. The following terms describe arrays by their valence:
Valence | Description |
---|---|
0 | single |
1 | list, vector |
2 | table, matrix |
2 or more | multivalent |
display
- Class:
picture operation - Usage:
display A
- See Also:
picture, execute
The operation display
returns a string which, when executed, returns
the value A
.
set "decor; display 23.5
'23.5'
Display
inserts the operation to construct values that cannot be
described directly by constants. In the example below, since the phrase
containing a blank character cannot be specified simply using the phrase
mark, display inserts the operation phrase
and the string that will
create the desired phrase An answer
.
display "Nm (phrase 'An answer') 'Nm'
'["Nm,(phrase 'An answer'),'Nm']'
X := "Name (2 3 (4 5) 'Queen''s' (3 2 reshape count 6))
+-----+-----------------------+
|"Name|+-+-+---+---------+---+|
| ||2|3|4 5|'Queen's'|1 2||
| || | | | |3 4||
| || | | | |5 6||
| |+-+-+---+---------+---+|
+-----+-----------------------+
display X
'["Name,[2,3,4 5,'Queen''s',3 2 reshape 1 2 3 4 5 6]]'
execute display X = X
l
In the definition of X
, strand notation was used. In the display of
X
, brackets notation is created to represent X
. The display is seen
to be correct by the last example that shows that the execute
of the
display
of X
is X
.
Equation
execute display A = A
diverse
- Class:
logic operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
diverse A
- See Also:
equal, in, cull
The operation diverse
tests whether or not the items of A
are all
different. It returns true
if they are and false
if they are not.
diverse 2 3 5
l
diverse 'hello world'
o
diverse 2 3 (2 3)
l
In the last example, the items are all different because the last item is a pair of items (2 3) which is not the same as 2 or 3.
Definition
diverse IS OPERATION A { cull A = list A }
Pragmatics
The operation diverse
executes faster when a large array has been
sorted, hence it is better to use sortup
to order a large array prior
to applying diverse
.
divide
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A divide B
A / B
A div B
divide A B
- See Also:
product, quotient, mod, reciprocal
The operation divide
returns the result of dividing two numeric atoms.
It coerces the type of the atoms to be real and gives a real number
result. If B
is a numeric zero, the result is the fault ?div
.
If one argument is numeric and the other is a fault or if both arguments
are the same fault, the answer is the fault. In all other cases when one
or more of the arguments is not numeric, the result is the arithmetic
fault ?A
.
R gets 1 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
1 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
R outer divide R
1. 0.5 0.4 ?A ?A ?error
2. 1. 0.8 ?A ?A ?error
2.5 1.25 1. ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
The above example illustrates all combinations of atom types for the two
arguments to divide
.
Equations
1.0 divide A = reciprocal A
A divide B = A times reciprocal B (within roundoff error)
down
- Class:
recursion transformer - Usage:
DOWN [test, endf, structf, joinf] A
- See Also:
recur, across
DOWN is a general transformer that recurs over the depth of an array to
some arbitrary level. DOWN has four operation arguments: test
tests
when the recursion has gone as deep as necessary, endf
is applied to
the argument that satisfies test
, structf
rearranges the argument
before recurring on each item, and joinf
combines the results of the
recursion on the items.
DOWN [ atomic, 0 minus, pass, pass] 3 -4 (5 6)
+--+-+-----+
|-3|4|-5 -6|
+--+-+-----+
DOWN [ simple, dosum, pack, pass ] 3 4 5 6
18
DOWN [ atomic, 0 first, pass, 1 plus max ] [2, [3, 4, [5],8],24]
3
Definition
DOWN IS TRANSFORMER test endf structf joinf OPERATION A {
Candidates := [A];
Results := Null;
WHILE not empty Candidates DO
Candidates B := [front, last] Candidates;
IF B = "Start THEN
Candidates Shp := [front, last] Candidates;
N := prod Shp;
IF N = 0 THEN N := N + 1; ENDIF;
Results Items := opposite N [drop, take] Results;
Results := Results append joinf (Shp reshape Items);
ELSEIF test B THEN
Results := results append endf B;
ELSE
B := structf B;
Candidates := Candidates link [shape B, "Start] link reverse list B;
IF empty B THEN Candidates := Candidates append first B; ENDIF;
ENDIF;
ENDWHILE;
first Results }
Equations
DOWN [test, endf, structf, joinf ] A
= FORK [test, endf, joinf EACH DOWN [test, endf, structf, joinf] structf ] A
opposite A = DOWN [ atomic, 0 minus, pass, pass] A
sum A = DOWN [ simple, dosum, pack, pass ] A
depth A = DOWN [ atomic, 0 minus, pass, pass] A
drop
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A drop B
drop A B
- See Also:
take, rest
The operation drop
selects the items of an array after a specified
number of items have been dropped. If B
is a list and A
is a
non-negative integer, the result is the list formed from dropping A
items from the front of B
. If A
is a negative integer, the result is
formed by dropping abs A
items from the right end of B
.
If B
is a table and A
is a pair of non-negative integers, the result
is lower right corner of B
that remains after dropping the number of
rows and columns indicated by A
from the upper left corner of B
. If
one or both items of A
are negative, the dropping occurs from the
other end of the extent of the corresponding axis.
For a higher dimensional array B
, tally A must equal valence B
; and
the result is obtained by dropping from the front or back of the extents
along each axis. If B
is a single and product A
is zero, the result
is B
; otherwise the result is an empty array with valence of tally
A
.
2 drop "Able "Baker "Charlie "Dog
Charlie Dog
T1 := tell 2 4
+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|
+---+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+---+
1 2 drop T1
+---+---+
|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+
1 -2 drop T1
+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|
+---+---+
Definition
drop IS OPERATION A B {
IF not and EACH isinteger A THEN
fault '?left arg of drop must be integers'
ELSEIF valence B = 0 THEN
IF product A > 0 THEN
(tally A reshape 0) reshape B
ELSE
B
ENDIF
ELSEIF tally A ~= valence B THEN
fault '?valence error in drop'
ELSE
((A < 0) + (-1 * (A >= 0) )) * (shape B - abs A max 0) take B
ENDIF }
Equations
0 times shape B drop B = B
tally B drop list B = Null
dropright
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
A dropright B
dropright A B
- See Also:
drop, takeright, front
The operation dropright
is an obsolete operation that drops items from
the ends of extents. It is provided to retain compatibility with earlier
versions of Q’Nial.
Definition
dropright IS OPERATION A B { opposite A drop B }
each
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
EACH f A
- See Also:
eachall, eachboth, eachleft, eachright, iterate, unary pervasive
The transformer EACH
forms an operation, called the EACH
transform
of f
, that applies f
to every item of the argument A
. The shape of
the result of the application of EACH f
to A
is the same shape as
A
.
EACH reverse ('abc' 'def' 'ghi')
+---+---+---+
|cba|fed|ihg|
+---+---+---+
EACH first tell 3 4
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
EACH
is used to distribute an operation f
across an entire array
A
. Its use avoids the need to explicitly allocate space for the result
and to write an explicit loop to apply f
to each item of A
individually.
Equations
shape EACH f A = shape A
I in grid A ==> I pick (EACH f A) = f (I pick A)
(EACH f) (EACH g) A = EACH (f g) A
EACH f A = shape A reshape (f first A hitch EACH f rest A)
EACH f single A = single f A
EACH f solitary A = solitary f A
EACH f list A = list EACH f A
isshape A ==> EACH f (A reshape B) = A reshape EACH f B
EACH f link A = link EACH EACH f A
EACH EACH f cart A = cart EACH EACH f A
eachall
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
EACHALL f A
- See Also:
each, eachboth, eachleft, eachright, pack, multi pervasive
The transformer EACHALL
forms an operation which applies f
to arrays
formed by selecting the items of the items of A
in corresponding
positions, assuming that the items of A
are all of the same shape.
When the items of A
are not all the same shape, A
is examined to see
if all the items with tally greater than one have the same shape. If so,
all the items of tally 1 are replicated to that shape. If not, the fault
?conform
is returned. EACHALL
is implicitly applied in multi
pervasive operations.
A := 9 [2] (4 4 reshape (5+tell 16))
+-+-+-----------+
|9|2| 5 6 7 8|
| | | 9 10 11 12|
| | |13 14 15 16|
| | |17 18 19 20|
+-+-+-----------+
pack A
+------+------+------+------+
|9 2 5 |9 2 6 |9 2 7 |9 2 8 |
+------+------+------+------+
|9 2 9 |9 2 10|9 2 11|9 2 12|
+------+------+------+------+
|9 2 13|9 2 14|9 2 15|9 2 16|
+------+------+------+------+
|9 2 17|9 2 18|9 2 19|9 2 20|
+------+------+------+------+
(EACH sum) pack A
16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31
EACHALL sum A
16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31
sum A
16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31
The example shows that EACHALL
is defined in terms of pack
and is
implicitly used in the multi pervasive operation sum
.
Definition
EACHALL IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A { EACH f pack A }
Equations
shape EACHALL f A = shape pack A
I in grid pack A ==> I pick (EACHALL f A) = f (I pick pack A)
eachboth
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
A EACHBOTH f B
EACHBOTH f A B
- See Also:
each, eachall, eachleft, eachright, pack, binary pervasive
The transformer EACHBOTH
forms an operation which applies f
to pairs
formed by selecting the items of A
and B
in corresponding positions,
assuming that A
and B
have the same shape.
When A
and B
do not have the same shape, if either A
or B
has
only one item, that item is replicated to the shape of the other
argument; otherwise, the fault ?conform
is returned.
EACHBOTH
is used implicitly in all binary pervasive operations.
7 2 1 EACHBOTH post 4 5 3
+-+-+-+
|7|2|1|
|4|5|3|
+-+-+-+
Definition
EACHBOTH IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A B { EACHALL f A B }
Equations
shape (A EACHBOTH f B) = shape (A pack B)
I in grid pack A B ==> I pick (A EACHBOTH f B) = f (I pick (A pack B))
eachleft
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
A EACHLEFT f B
EACHLEFT f A B
- See Also:
each, eachall, eachboth, eachright
The transformer EACHLEFT
forms an operation which applies f
to pairs
formed by pairing the items of A
with B
. The shape of the result is
the shape of A
.
2 3 4 EACHLEFT reshape 5
+---+-----+-------+
|5 5|5 5 5|5 5 5 5|
+---+-----+-------+
(2 3 reshape 'abcdef') EACHLEFT hitch '123'
+----+----+----+
|a123|b123|c123|
+----+----+----+
|d123|e123|f123|
+----+----+----+
Definition
EACHLEFT IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A B { EACH (B CONVERSE f) A }
Equations
shape ( A EACHLEFT f B ) = shape A
I in grid A ==> I pick (A EACHLEFT f B) = f (I pick A) B
A EACHLEFT f B = A EACHBOTH f single B
single A EACHLEFT f B = single (A f B)
solitary A EACHLEFT f B = solitary (A f B)
list A EACHLEFT B = list (A EACHLEFT f B)
isshape S ==> (S reshape A) EACHLEFT f B = S reshape (A EACHLEFT f B)
eachright
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
A EACHRIGHT f B
EACHRIGHT f A B
- See Also:
each, eachleft, eachall, eachboth
The transformer EACHRIGHT
forms an operation which applies f
to
pairs formed by pairing A
with the items of B
. The shape of the
result is the shape of B
.
2 EACHRIGHT reshape 3 4 5
+---+---+---+
|3 3|4 4|5 5|
+---+---+---+
`X EACHRIGHT hitch (2 3 reshape 'ab' 'cd')
+---+---+---+
|Xab|Xcd|Xab|
+---+---+---+
|Xcd|Xab|Xcd|
+---+---+---+
Definition
EACHRIGHT IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A B { EACH ( A f ) B }
Equations
I in grid B ==> I pick (A EACHRIGHT f B) = f A (I pick B)
shape ( A EACHRIGHT f B ) = shape B
A EACHRIGHT f B = single A EACHBOTH f B
A EACHRIGHT f single B = single (A f B)
A EACHRIGHT f solitary B = solitary (A f B)
A EACHRIGHT f list B = list(A EACHRIGHT fB)
isshape S ==> A EACHRIGHT f (S reshape B) = S reshape (A EACHRIGHT f B)
edit
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
edit Filename
- See Also:
host, loaddefs
The operation edit
passes control to the standard editor, requesting
it to edit the file named by the string or phrase Filename
. The editor
used is determined by the environment variable EDITOR
or by a default
chosen for each version. When the editing task is completed, the editor
returns control to Q’Nial. The result is the fault ?noexpr
.
edit "test.ndf
edit 'data_records'
If edit
is used to edit a file of Nial definitions, the operation
loaddefs
must be executed on return from the editor to load the
definitions.
empty
- Class:
structure testing operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
empty A
- See Also:
null, in, simple, single
The operation empty
tests whether or not an array A
has any items.
If A
has no items, it returns true
; otherwise, false
. The
predefined expression Null
is empty as is any array with a zero in its
shape.
Since there are empty arrays with more than one dimension, it is better
to test for an empty array by using empty
rather than by direct
comparison with Null
.
empty Null
l
empty (0 3 2 reshape 5)
l
empty solitary 5
o
empty solitary Null
o
The last two examples show that a solitary is not empty even if the item it contains is empty.
Definition
empty IS OPERATION A { tally A = 0 }
Equation
empty A = 0 in shape A
equal
- Class:
logic operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
A equal B
A = B
equal A
- See Also:
unequal, match, mate, gte, lte
The operation equal
is normally used to compare two arrays A
and B
to see whether or not they are identical. It returns true
if they are
equal; false
otherwise. (Two nonempty arrays are identical if they
have identical shapes and hold identical items at each location. Two
empty arrays are identical if they have identical shapes.) Empty
is
extended to arbitrary arrays by returning true
if all items of an
array are identical.
The symbol = is a synonym for equal and can be used in both infix and
prefix application. In the Equations
sections of the dictionary
entries, the symbol = is used to separate two sides of an equation. To
test such an equation, it may be necessary to replace the expression
following = with the same expression in parentheses in order to force
correct parsing of the equation as a Nial expression.
2 3 4 = [2,3,4]
l
Null = ''
l
2 (3 4) = (2 3) 4
o
equal EACH shape tell 2 3 4
l
The first example shows that a triple formed using strand notation is
identical to that formed using brackets notation. The second shows that
Null
is equal to the empty string. The third shows that grouping items
of a list in different ways creates different arrays. The last shows the
convenience of the more general form of equal
.
Equations
A equal B <==> shape A = shape B
A equal B and (I in grid A) ==> I pick A = I pick B
equations
- Class:
concept
The equations in the Nial Dictionary and in the on-line help provide an abbreviated way of stating properties of the term or object being described. They could be expanded into an explanation in English but that would lengthen the manual considerably.
The equations use variables such as A
,B
and C
that take on array
values; and variables such as f
, g and h
that denote operations that
map arrays to arrays. An equation holds for all arrays and for all
computable operations without side effects, unless a specific
qualification is made. Thus, the equation:
(EACH f) (EACH g) A = EACH (f g) A
says that for all operations f
and g
and all arrays A
, the use of
the EACH
transform of f
on the result of the use of the EACH
transform of g
on A
has the same value as the use of the EACH
transform of the composition of f
and g
on A
. In mathematical
terms, the EACH
transformer distributes over operation composition.
The symbol =
is used in its mathematical sense in equations and
separates two Nial expressions. The symbol =
has higher precedence
than the two expressions it is separating. Where the Nial equivalent to
=
is needed to state the equation, the term equal
is used.
To test an equation using Q’Nial, in order to force the correct parsing of the equation as a Nial expression, it may be necessary to replace
Expr1 = Expr2
with
Expr1 = ( Expr2 )
The equality used in equations assumes that both sides of the equations compute without triggering a fault and produce equal arrays; or both produce the same fault value if fault triggering is off. In some cases, the equality is inexact due to roundoff errors.
The symbol =f=
is used to denote an equality where both sides produce
the same non-fault value; but in some cases one or both of the sides may
fault and the equality is no longer valid.
Some of the equations are qualified by a constraint on the variables. The constraint is written in English or as a conditional expression in Nial that must hold for the equation to be true. In a statement of the form
Expr ==> Eqn
Expr is the qualification written as a Nial boolean expression, the symbol ==> is used for “implies”, and Eqn is the equation that holds under the qualification.
The symbol <==> denotes an if and only if implication. Thus a statement of the form
Expr1 <==> Expr2
states that both expressions have the same truth value; either both are true or both are false.
Reading the Equations
The equations related to abs
, the operation that finds the absolute
value of a number, are:
abs A = EACH abs A
shape abs A = shape A
abs abs A = abs A
The first two come from the property that abs
is unary pervasive
.
The first one says that applying abs
to an array A
is the same as
applying abs
to the items of array A
. It also implies that the shape
of the result of abs A
is the same as shape of A
since EACH
transforms always preserve shape. The second equation says that the
shape of the result of abs A
is the same as the shape of A
. The
third equation indicates that subsequent applications of abs
after the
first do not change the result.
The equations related to minus
, denoted by -
, are:
A - B = EACH - pack A B
shape (A - B) = shape pack A B
A - B = A + opposite B
The first equation says that pair of arrays A
and B
are packed at
each level of nesting to bring corresponding items together. Then, the
items are subtracted.
The second equation states that the shape of the result of subtracting
A
from B
is the shape formed by packing A
and B
. The third
equation states that subtracting A
from B
is equivalent to adding
the opposite of B
to A
.
The equations related to hitch
are as follows:
A hitch B = A hitch list B
list (A hitch B) = A hitch B
The first says that hitch
treats its right argument as though it were
a list, and the second states that the result of hitch
is a list.
The following equations illustrate the use of qualifications:
atomic A ==> single A = A
not empty A ==> mix rows A = A
diverse A <==> cull A = list A
The first equation says that if A
is atomic, the single of A
is
equal to A
. That is, the single of an atom is the atom. The second
equation says that if A
is not empty, forming the rows of A
and
applying mix
to recombine them, results in the original array. The
third equation says that if A
is diverse, the cull of A
is equal to
the list of A
; and that if A
is not diverse, the cull of A
is not
equal to the list of A
.
There are many identities that hold for all arrays in Nial. Three general equations are the following:
A unary pervasive operation f satisfies the equation:
f A = EACH f A
A binary pervasive operation f satisfies the equation:
A f B = A EACHBOTH f B
A multi pervasive operation f satisfies the equations:
f A = EACHALL f A
f A = REDUCE f A
erase
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
erase Nm
- See Also:
symbols
The operation erase
is used to remove unwanted global definitions and
variables from the workspace. The argument Nm
must be a phrase or
string giving the object to be removed. Predefined names and names in
local scopes cannot be removed.
When a name has been erased, it remains in the symbol table with its original role. It can be redefined in the same role or, if a variable, reassigned a value by a subsequent action. A name cannot change its role once established.
average IS divide[sum,tally];
calc IS EACH average;
Var3 := calc (2 3 4) (5 6 7)
3. 6.
EACH erase "average 'Var3' "sum
?noexpr ?noexpr ?system name
In the example above, the operation sum
cannot be erased as it is a
predefined operation. In the next three examples below, faults are
returned because of missing variables or operations that were erased.
The effect of erasing an object is not propagated to other definitions
referring to the erased name.
Var3
?no_value
average count 10
?missing_op
calc (2 3 4) (5 6 7)
?missing_op ?missing_op
average := 5 6 7
?invalid assignment: AVERAGE := <***> 5 6
In the last example, an attempt is made to redefine the role of
average
and Q’Nial indicated that average
is not a suitable name for
such an assignment.
eraserecord
- Class:
nial direct access file operation - Usage:
eraserecord Filenum N
- See Also:
readrecord, writerecord, readarray, writearray, open, close, filetally
The operation eraserecord
is used to erase component N
of direct
access file designated by the number Filenum
. In a file with record
components, eraserecord
replaces the erased component with an empty
string. In a file with array components, it replaces the erased
component with the fault ?missing
.
N
may be a single record number or a list of record numbers.
If the last component in a file is erased, any immediately preceding
components that are empty in a record component file or contain the
fault ?missing
in an array component file are also removed. The file
tally, which records the number of records in the file, is adjusted
accordingly.
The operation returns the fault ?noexpr
or a fault indicating improper
use of the operation.
File_num := open "Names "d ;
eraserecord File_num 23 ;
eval
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
eval Pt
- See Also:
execute, scan, parse, value
The operation eval
provides access to the underlying expression
evaluator of Q’Nial. The argument to eval
must be a parse tree
returned by parse
or getdef
, a named expression or a cast which
represents a Nial expression. The effect is to evaluate the expression
and return the resulting value. As seen below, the parse tree can be one
formed by using the cast mechanism or one built explicitly using
parse
.
eval parse scan '23 + 45'
68
eval !(23 + 45)
68
The next example shows that eval
can be used to evaluate a named
expression using either the cast or the phrase of its name.
A := 100 ;
Addone IS (A := A + 1);
(eval !Addone)(eval "Addone)
101 102
(eval !A)(eval "A)(value "A)
102 ?not an expression 102
The last example shows that eval
can be used to evaluate the cast of a
variable but not a phrase naming the variable. The operation value
should be used
instead.
Equations
S a string holding a Nial expression ==> eval parse scan S = execute S
Pt a parse tree ==> eval parse deparse Pt = eval P
except
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A except B
except A B
- See Also:
cull, sublist, notin
The operation except
returns the list of items of A
that are not in
B
. It corresponds to set difference if A
and B
are viewed as set
representations. The result is a list with items in the same order as in
A
.
count 10 except 3 5 7
1 2 4 6 8 9 10
'a list of words' except 'aeiou'
lst f wrds
tell 2 3 except [0 0]
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 1|0 2|1 0|1 1|1 2|
+---+---+---+---+---+
tell 2 3 except (0 0)
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|1 0|1 1|1 2|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
The last two examples show that if the left argument has nonatomic items, to remove a single non-atomic array, the right argument must be made into a solitary list. Otherwise the items of the right argument are used.
Definition
except IS OPERATION A B { A EACHLEFT notin B sublist A }
Equations
list (A except B) = A except B
list A except list B = A except B
(A except B) except C = A except (B link C)
A except cull B = A except B
Pragmatics
The operation except
uses an internal sort on its arguments to reduce
the algorithmic complexity of the above definition. It executes
considerably faster if its arguments have already been sorted.
execute
The operation execute
evaluates a Nial expression given as a string
S
. The result of the evaluation is returned. The execution of the
string takes place in the environment where execute is applied.
If the string contains a name, the local meaning of that name will be used if a local meaning exists. If execution of the string results in the creation of a new variable or defined name, the new object is placed in the global environment.
If a string being executed contains an integer representation that would be converted to an integer outside the range for the computer, the result is converted to the corresponding real number.
execute '23 + 40045'
40068.
A := count 5; opname := 'product';
execute link opname ' A'
120
The last example shows that Nial program text can be constructed under program control and then executed. This feature is useful in applications where responses are generated by combining text elements based on the user input and the current state of the computation. The technique is useful for applications involving computer assisted instruction and knowledge based systems.
It is more efficient to use eval
to evaluate the cast of an expression
than to use execute
to evaluate the corresponding string. In the
former approach the scan
and parse
is done once, whereas in the
latter it is repeated on each execution.
Definition
execute IS OPERATION A { eval parse scan A }
Equations
execute readscreen Prompt = read Prompt
Txt, a Nial expression ==> eval !(Txt) = execute 'Txt'
S a string holding a Nial expression ==> execute canonical S = execute S
where canonical IS link descan deparse parse scan.
exp
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
exp A
- See Also:
ln, power, log
The operation exp
implements the exponential function of mathematics.
It produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six
types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | exponential of the corresponding real |
integer | exponential of the corresponding real |
real | exponential of A |
character | fault ?exp |
phrase | fault ?exp |
fault | argument A |
exp o 1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
1. 2.71828 1.64872 ?exp ?exp ?error
Equations
exp ln A = A (within roundoff error)
exp A = exp 1.0 power A (within roundoff error)
expression
- Class:
concept - See Also:
operation, transformer
The term expression is used in its most general sense to describe a
program fragment that denotes one of the three primary objects of Nial:
an array
, an operation
, or a transformer
. However, in most
contexts we use the term as an abbreviation of an array expression
.
An array expression denotes an array value. That is, it is a program
fragment that when evaluated in the proper context will produce an
array. The predefined expressions of Q’Nial either produce a constant
value, or they carry out some system action and return the fault value
?noexpr
.
The control constructs of Nial are array expressions made up of keywords, simple-expressions and expression-sequences.
A named expression is either a predefined expression or an expression
that has been given an explicit name using the IS
definition
mechanism.
expression sequence
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
expression
An expression-sequence is the main construct used for program text that produces a value. It consists of one or more expressions separated by semi-colons and possible followed by a semi-colon.
expression-sequence ::= expression
{ ; expression } [ ; ]
The expressions in an expression-sequence are evaluated in left-to-right
order. If the sequence does not terminate with a semicolon, the array
returned is the result of the last expression. If the sequence does end
with a semicolon, the array returned is the fault ?noexpr
. At the top
level loop, if the array returned is the fault ?noexpr
, it is not
displayed.
exprs
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Exprs
- See Also:
symbols
The expression Exprs
returns a list of phrases giving the names of all
user defined expressions in the workspace.
Definition
Exprs IS {
Names Roles := pack symbols 0;
"expr match Roles sublist Names }
extent
The term extent is used to describe the length of an axis of an array in a particular dimension. Thus a 4 by 6 table is said to have extent 4 in the first dimension and extent 6 in the second dimension.
external declaration
external-declaration ::= identifier IS
EXTERNAL ( EXPRESSION
| OPERATION
| TRANSFORMER
| VARIABLE )
An external declaration assigns a role to a name, allowing it to be used in a definition before its own definition is given. This mechanism is useful for creating mutually recursive definitions. An external declaration is made only in the global environment.
If the name is already defined with the same role, the declaration has no effect. If the name has another role, a fault is reported. If the name is not currently defined, a default object is associated with it.
false
- Class:
constant expression - Usage:
False
- See Also:
true, isboolean
The constant expression False
denotes the boolean atom for false
,
which Nial also denotes by o
. It is the result of comparing two arrays
that are not identical for equality.
False (not False)
ol
Equations
tally False = 1
shape False = Null
single False = False
not False = True
fault
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
fault S
- See Also:
isfault, phrase, quiet_fault, settrigger, string
The operation fault
converts a string or phrase into the fault value
with the string as its message. If the argument is not a string, phrase
or a fault, the result is the fault ?type error
.
Fault
is used to construct faults that contain blanks or other
characters than cannot appear in a literal fault or ones constructed
from a message provided from the host system.
By default, fault triggering is on when the interpreter is initialized.
This causes the creation of a fault to interrupt the flow of execution.
The operation quiet_fault
can be used to create a fault value without
triggering an interrupt.
settrigger o;
fault '?missing data'
?missing data
fault "Notastring
Notastring
fault 3.4
?type error
The convention is that all faults generated by Q’Nial internally begin
with the character ?
. The second example shows that this is not a
requirement.
Equations
isfault F ==> fault string F = F
isstring S ==> string fault S = S
fault triggering
- Class:
concept - See Also:
fault values, settrigger, quiet_fault
Nial assumes that every computation that terminates results in an array value. However, there are many cases where a computation does not have a sensible answer. If division by zero occurs, for example, there is no suitable number to return. Nial uses special atomic arrays called faults to indicate such results. For division by zero it is ?div.
Q’Nial has two ways of handling a fault: either a trigger mechanism is executed that causes an interruption when a fault is created, or during execution of a defined operation, expression or transformer the fault is treated as a normal atomic array.
When Q’Nial is invoked for interactive execution with the -i option, the
fault triggering mechanism is turned on by default. When it is invoked
for execution only the fault triggering capbility is turned off. During
interactive execution, the state of the triggering mechanism can be
turned on or off using the operation settrigger
. The operation
quiet_fault
can be used to create a fault without causing fault
triggering.
If fault triggering is set and a fault is generated during execution of a defined operation, execution is interrupted. On an interruption caused by a fault, a display message appears giving the call stack of definitions currently executing and the line of text that caused the fault. For example, the definition:
foo is op A B { A / B + 1 }
followed by the evaluation of the expression
foo 3 0
results in the output:
-------------------------------------------------------------
Fault interruption loop: enter expressions or
type: <Return> to jump to top level
current call stack :
foo
?div triggered in : ... A / B
-------------------------------------------------------------
>>>
where the string ‘>>>’ is a special prompt indicating that a fault has occurred and execution has been interrupted. The prompt permits you to query the value of variables in the expression and its surrounding computation or to view the operation that has triggered the fault. The above session might continue as:
>>> see "foo
foo IS OPERATION A B {
A / B + 1 }
>>> A
3
>>> B
0
>>>
A variable in a definition that called the current one can be referenced
by preceding the variables name by the definition name and a colon, e.g.
G:X
denotes variable X
in definition G
. You can execute any
expressions you want at the prompt. A useful thing to do is to see the
definition that has interrupted. When you are ready to resume, reply to
the prompt with a Return and control returns to the interactive loop.
fault values
- Class:
concept
The Role of Faults
A fault is a special kind of atomic value used by Q’Nial to signal special values or to indicate that an operation has been given an argument it cannot handle in a normal way. The special value faults are:
Fault | Meaning |
---|---|
?noexpr | indicates that no answer is expected |
?eof | end of file indication |
?I | Zenith which is greater than all atoms |
?O | Nadir which is less than all atoms |
filelength
- Class:
host direct access file operation - Usage:
filelength Filename
- See Also:
readfield, writefield
The operation filelength
returns the length in bytes of the host file
named by string or phrase Filename
. It is used in conjunction with
readfield
and writefield
in processing host files.
Len := filelength "Myfile;
Data := readfield "Myfile 0 Len;
In the example, filelength
is used to determine the size of the file
and readfield
is used to read it in as raw byte data. If the file
corresponds to a text file, the data will include end of line
indications appropriate for the host system.
filestatus
- Class:
file expression - Usage:
Filestatus
- See Also:
status, open, close, filetally
The expression Filestatus
gives information on the files currently
open in a Q’Nial session. It returns a list of triples, one for each
open file, giving the file number as an integer, the filename as a
phrase and the mode as a character.
The modes are r
, w, a, d, pr, pw and c
, standing for read
, write,
append, direct, pipe_read, pipe_write and communications
respectively.
The files for standard input, standard output and standard error are opened with modes of r, w and w respectively using file numbers 0, 1 and 2.
Fnum := open "F "a;
Filestatus
+---------+----------+----------+-----+
|0 stdin r|1 stdout w|2 stderr w|3 F a|
+---------+----------+----------+-----+
filetally
- Class:
Nial direct access file operation - Usage:
filetally Filenum
- See Also:
open, readarray, writearray, filelength
The operation filetally
returns the number of records in the file
designated by Filenum
, an integer returned by an earlier call to
open
. The filetally is one higher than the highest component number of
a record or array that is written but not erased.
Fn := open "newfile `d;
writearray Fn (9 99) ('The' 'End');
filetally Fn
100
filter
- Class:
selection transformer - Usage:
FILTER f A
- See Also:
each, sublist
The transformer FILTER
is given a predicate operation f
that is used
to select items from A
. The result of applying FILTER f
is to
produce a list of the items of A
that satisfy the predicate f
.
FILTER (0<) (4 -2 3 -5)
4 3
FILTER (not isphrase) (37 4.5 "cat)
37 4.5
Definition
FILTER IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A { EACH f A sublist A }
Equations
tally FILTER f A = sum EACH f A
find
- Class:
search operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A find B
find A B
- See Also:
findall, seek, in, gage, sortup
The operation find
returns the address of the first occurrence of A
as an item of B
, searching B
in row major order. If A
does not
occur in B
, the result is the gage
of shape B
. The result of
find
is an integer if B
is a list; and a list of integers of tally
equal to valence B
otherwise.
set "diagram ;
3 find 56 34 3 23 3 57 3
2
The result of find is 2.
`a find 'hello world'
11
2 3 find count 3 4
+-+-+
|1|2|
+-+-+
In the second example, the character a is not in the string ‘hello world’ and the result is the tally of ‘hello world’. In the last example, the result is a list of two integers because the valence of count 3 4 is 2.
Definition
find IS OPERATION A B { gage first ( A findall B append shape B ) }
Equations
A seek B = A [in,find] B
A in B ==> A find B pick B = A
I in grid A and diverse A ==> I pick A find A = I
Pragmatics
The operation find
uses a linear search on the items of B
if the
array has not been sorted, or uses a binary search algorithm if it has.
The latter fact suggests that an array that is searched frequently
should be kept in lexicographical order by applying sortup
to it when
it is created or changed.
findall
- Class:
search operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A findall B
findall A B
- See Also:
find, choose, seek, in
The operation findall
returns a list of the addresses of all
occurrences of A
as an item of B
, searching B
in row major order.
If A
does not occur in B
, the result is the empty list Null
.
The result of findall
is a list of integers if B
is a list and a
list of pairs if B
is a table.
3 findall 56 34 3 23 3 57 3
2 4 6
X := 3 4 reshape 1 7 3 2 3 4 3 2 6 3
1 7 3 2
3 4 3 2
6 3 1 7
3 findall X
+---+---+---+---+
|0 2|1 0|1 2|2 1|
+---+---+---+---+
`a findall 'hello world'
1 1 findall tell 3 4
+---+
|1 1|
+---+
In the first example findall
returns the list of integers where 3 is
found in the list; in the second a list of pairs is returned. The last
example shows that if only one occurrence is found the result is a
solitary list.
Definition
findall IS OPERATION A B { A EACHRIGHT equal B sublist grid B }
Equations
(list A) findall B = A findall B
list (A findall B) = A findall B
A in B ==> A find B = first (A findall B)
Pragmatics
The operation findall
uses a linear search on the items of B
if the
array has not been sorted, or uses a binary search algorithm if it has.
The latter fact suggests that an array that is searched frequently
should be kept in lexicographical order by applying sortup
to it when
it is created or changed.
first
The operation first
returns the first of the items of A
. If A
is
empty, it returns the fault ?address
.
first 4 5 6
4
first count 3 4 5
1 1 1
first Null
?address
Definition
first IS OPERATION A { 0 pick list A }
Equations
first single A = A
first solitary A = A
first list A = first A
first (S reshape A) = first A
(valence A reshape 0) pick A = first A
flip
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Usage:
flip A
- See Also:
pack
The operation flip
is a synonym for pack
. It has been retained for
compatibility with earlier versions.
floor
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
floor A
- See Also:
ceiling
The operation floor
produces the following results when applied to
atoms of the six
types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | corresponding integer |
integer | argument A |
real | next lower integer, or the fault ?A if the result is outside the range of integers |
char | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
floor l -2 3.5 `a "abc ??error
1 -2 3 ?A ?A ?error
floor 3.5 -4.6 7.0 25.3e20
3 -5 7 ?A
Equation
floor A = opposite ceiling opposite A
fold
- Class:
applicative transformer - Usage:
N FOLD f A
FOLD f N A
- See Also:
iterate, each
The transformer FOLD
modifies an operation f
to one that takes a
pair of arguments consisting of an integer N
and an arbitrary array
A
. The result of applying N FOLD A
is to apply f
, N times,
applying it first to A
and subsequently to the result of the previous
application.
3 FOLD rest 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 8 9
2 FOLD sum (2 3 4) (5 6 7)
27
sum sum (2 3 4) (5 6 7)
27
Definition
FOLD IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION N A {
IF N > 0 THEN
N - 1 FOLD f ( f A )
ELSE
A
ENDIF }
Equations
0 FOLD f A = A
1 FOLD f A = f A
2 FOLD f A = f f A
fork
- Class:
control structure transformer - Usage:
FORK [f,g,h] A
FORK [f,g,h,i,j,...z] A
- See Also:
iterate, if-expr
The transformer FORK
implements a conditional functional mechanism
corresponding to the if-expression. The argument to FORK
must be an
atlas of length two or more. The operation in the first position is a
predicate. If there are exactly three items in the atlas, the first is a
predicate; the second is applied to A
if the predicate returns true
;
and the third is applied to A
if the predicate returns false
. That
is, if f A
is true
, the result is g A
; otherwise it is h A
.
If there are more than three operations in the atlas, they are taken in
pairs from left to right. The first of each pair must be a predicate and
is applied to A
in turn until a result is true
. The result of the
transform is the result of applying the second of that pair to A
. If
no application results in true
and the number of operations in the
atlas is an odd number, the last operation is evaluated. Otherwise the
result is the fault ?noexpr
.
FORK [atomic, opposite, 1 +] (3 -4 (5 6 7))
+-+--+-----+
|4|-3|6 7 8|
+-+--+-----+
FORK [isreal,floor,simple,sum,5+] 2 4 6
12
Equation
FORK [A first, B first, C first, D first, E first] Null = IF A THEN B ELSEIF C THEN D ELSE E ENDIF
for-loop
- Class:
control structure - Usage:
FOR Var WITH Exp DO ExpSeq ENDFOR
- See Also:
repeat-loop, while-loop, iterate, each
The FOR-loop
control structure is used to execute the expression
sequence ExpSeq
repeatedly while variable Var
takes on the values
specified as items in the simple expression Exp
.
FOR X WITH 1. 2. 3. DO
write (X) (X*X) (X power X) ;
ENDFOR
1. 1. 1.
2. 4. 4.
3. 9. 27.
In the example, X takes on the values 1., 2. and 3. in successive loops and the values of X, X squared and X to the power X are displayed.
fromraw
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
fromraw A B
- See Also:
toraw
The operation fromraw
converts the boolean array B
to a simple array
of the same type as atom A
.
fromraw `a olloooololloooloolloooll
abc
fromraw 0 ooooooooooooooooooooooololollool
345
fromraw 0.0 olooooooolooooololoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
34.5
fromraw l lollo
lollo
Equation
simple A and and (type A match type first A) => A = fromraw (toraw A) (first A)
Pragmatics
Fromraw
is used to convert raw bit data into atomic data that can be
manipulated by Nial. If the data was created from Nial data using
toraw
then it will work in a system independent way. However, if raw
byte data is obtained using readfile
and then converted using toraw
the host system byte ordering may need to be allowed for.
front
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
front A
- See Also:
last, rest, first
The operation front
returns a list of all items but the last of A
.
If A
is a solitary or is empty, the result is the empty list Null
.
front 3 4 5 6
3 4 5
front tell 2 3
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|1 0|1 1|
+---+---+---+---+---+
Definition
front IS OPERATION A { tally A - 1 max 0 reshape list A }
Equations
front A = front list A
list front A = front A
front Null = Null
not empty A ==> front A append last A = list A
shape A reshape (front A append last A) = A
functions in nial
- Class:
concept - See Also:
operation, transformer
A function is a mathematical name for an object that maps an argument in a given domain to a result in a given range. In Nial, an operation is an object in the set of functions from the domain of Nial arrays to the range of Nial arrays. Thus, an operation always applies to an array and returns an array.
A transformer in Nial is also a function. It domain is Nial
operations and its range is also Nial operations. Since its argument is
itself a function, a transformer is said to be a second order
function. A transformer always applies to an operation and results in an
operation.
Definitions in which the associated object is a simple-expression are used to name program fragments that return an array value but which do not need parameters. The resulting named-expression behaves like a function having no parameters.
Nial is considered to be a functional language, but it is not purely functional in that it has assignments, loops and other non-functional concepts.
fuse
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
I fuse A
fuse I A
- See Also:
transpose, blend, split
The operation fuse
is used for two distinct purposes. If I
is simple
and contains all the axes of A
without repetition, the result is an
array formed by a permutation of the axes of A
by I
. The shape of
the result is I choose shape A
. If I
is not simple but link I
is
simple and contains all of the axes of A
without repetition, the
result is obtained by diagonalizing along axes that are grouped
together, ordering them according to the ordering in I
.
If link I
does not contain all the axes or if there are repetitions of
the axes in link I
, the fault ?invalid fuse
is returned.
A := 2 3 4 reshape count 24
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24
1 2 0 fuse A
1 13 5 17 9 21
2 14 6 18 10 22
3 15 7 19 11 23
4 16 8 20 12 24
0 (1 2) fuse A
1 6 11
13 18 23
[0 1 2] fuse A
1 18
The first example is an axis permutation; the last two are diagonalizations.
Equations
axes A fuse A = A
transpose A = ( reverse axes A fuse A )
sortup I = axes A and not empty A ==> shape ( I fuse A ) = I choose shape A
gage
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
gage A
- See Also:
pick, tell, grid
The operation gage
is used to convert an array of integers into an
atomic integer if there is only one item or a list if there is more than
one. The integers must be non-negative otherwise the fault ?gage
is
produced.
gage 4 5 6
4 5 6
gage find 5 (tell 10)
6
gage 3 -4 5
?gage
The main purpose of gage
is to express a list of non-negative integers
in the form an address takes, i.e. it converts a solitary integer to the
integer itself and leaves all other lists alone.
Definition
gage is OPERATION A {
IF and EACH isinteger A THEN
IF tally A = 1 THEN
IF first A >= 0 THEN first A ELSE ??gage ENDIF
ELSE
IF and EACH (0<=) A THEN list A ELSE ??gage ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
??gage
ENDIF }
getdef
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
getdef Nm
- See Also:
parse, eval, see
The operation getdef
retrieves the parse tree associated with the
global definition named Nm
. Nm
may be a phrase or a string. Only the
parse trees associated with global user definitions can be retrieved.
foo IS first ; getdef "foo
+---+-----------------------------+
|100|+--+---------------+------+-+|
| ||11|+--+----------+|3 47 3|1||
| || ||22|2 160 7459|| | ||
| || |+--+----------+| | ||
| |+--+---------------+------+-+|
+---+-----------------------------+
The example shows a parse tree for a simple definition. For definitions of any reasonable size the diagram of the parse tree becomes too large to examine easily.
The primary use of getdef
is to provide an interface between internal
representations and the editing facilities. It is used in see
and
defedit
. The detailed form of the parse tree is implementation
specific and may change in future releases.
getfile
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
getfile Filename
- See Also:
putfile, appendfile, open, readfile
The operation getfile
returns the records of the text file named by
the string or phrase Filename
as a list of strings. The file must not
be open.
Recs := getfile "Myfile;
Definition
getfile IS OPERATION Filename {
Fnum := open Filename `r;
IF isfault Fnum THEN
Fnum
ELSE
Lines := '';
Line := readfile Fnum;
WHILE Line ~= ??eof DO
Lines := Lines append Line;
Line := readfile Fnum;
ENDWHILE;
Lines
ENDIF }
getname
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
getname Triple
- See Also:
parse, cast, getdef
The operation getname
retrieves the variable or definition name
associated with a name reference triple
within a parse tree. The
argument must be a triple with first item 2 that has been produced by
the Q’Nial parser. The operation is useful when analyzing the structure
of a parse tree representation. This is a specialized task and getname
is used only with considerable knowledge of the internal workings of
Q’Nial.
getsyms
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
getsyms Nm
- See Also:
parse, getdef
The operation getsyms
retrieves the parameters and local variables of
a defined operation or expression named by Nm
. The operation is useful
when analyzing the name usage of a definition in the context of
analyzing the name interaction among a set of definitions. This is a
specialized task and getsyms
is used only with considerable knowledge
of the semantics of Q’Nial.
global environment
- Class:
concept - See Also:
local environment
The global environment is the set of associations between names and objects formed in the workspace that are either predefined in Nial or have been created by actions that have taken place during a session.
grade
- Class:
sorting transformer - Usage:
GRADE f A
- See Also:
sort, gradeup, lte, gte
The transformer GRADE
modifies a comparator f
to produce an
operation that, when applied to A
, returns an array of addresses of
the same shape as A
that orders A
according to the comparator. The
addresses can be used to select the items of A
(using choose
) so
that the items are in order according to f
.
A comparator is an operation that compares two arrays and returns
true
if they are in the desired ordering or false
otherwise.
Operations lte
( <=
) and gte
( >=
) are the most commonly used
comparators.
A gets 3 2 reshape 65 77 4 19 22 11
65 77
4 19
22 11
Addrs := GRADE >= A
+---+---+
|0 1|0 0|
+---+---+
|2 0|1 1|
+---+---+
|2 1|1 0|
+---+---+
Addrs choose A
77 65
22 19
11 4
GRADE <= ("some "not "in "order)
3 1 0 2
GRADE <= ['xyz','abc','mno','cat']
?invalid comparison in GRADE
GRADE up ['xyz','abc','mno','cat']
1 3 2 0
The first three expressions illustrate that GRADE
returns the
addresses that re-order the items of table A
in descending order. The
next expression shows that the GRADE
transform of <=
can be applied
to a list of phrases. The second last expression shows that GRADE <=
cannot be applied to a list of strings. This is because <=
is used
itemwise on the characters of the strings and hence the comparator
yields a bitstring rather than an atomic boolean result. The last
expression shows that the comparator up
can be used with strings.
Equations
SORT f A = GRADE f A choose A
f a comparator ==> shape GRADE f A = shape A
gradeup
- Class:
sorting operation - Usage:
gradeup A
- See Also:
sortup, grade, up
The operation
gradeup 3 7 5 4 9 8 2 1 6 10
7 6 0 3 2 8 1 5 4 9
gradeup ("some "words "not "in "order)
3 2 4 0 1
Definition
gradeup IS GRADE up
Equation
gradeup A choose A = sortup A
grid
- Class:
array generation operation - Usage:
grid A
- See Also:
tell, address, shape
The operation grid
returns the array of addresses of the array A
.
The result has the same shape as A
. Each item of the result is the
address of the corresponding item in A
. The grid of a list is a list
of integers. The grid of a table is a table of pairs of integers.
grid 3 6 4 7 4
0 1 2 3 4
A := 2 3 reshape count 6; A (grid A)
+-----+-------------+
|1 2 3|+---+---+---+|
|4 5 6||0 0|0 1|0 2||
| |+---+---+---+|
| ||1 0|1 1|1 2||
| |+---+---+---+|
+-----+-------------+
Definition
grid IS OPERATION A { tell gage shape A }
Equations
grid A choose A = A
shape grid A = shape A
gt
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A gt B
A > B
gt A B
> A B
- See Also:
gte, lt, match, mate, max, sort
The operation gt
compares two atoms A
and B
with the greater
than
relation, returning true
if A
is greater than B
and false
otherwise. The symbol >
is a synonym for gt
.
The atoms in Nial are organized as a lattice using <=
for the
ordering. The numeric atoms are comparable across types but numeric and
literal atoms are incomparable. The literal types are not comparable
across types. A comparison between incomparable objects results in
false
.
R := l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER > R
oooooo
looooo
lloooo
oooooo
oooooo
oooooo
'apple' > 'above'
olloo
"apple > "above
l
The use of OUTER >
shows the comparisons between various atom types.
The last two examples show the difference between comparing two strings,
where the operation is distributed by its pervasive property; and
comparing the corresponding phrases.
Definition
gt IS OPERATION A B { (A gte B) and not (A mate B) }
gte
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A gte B
A >= B
gte A B
>= A B
- See Also:
gt, lte, match, sort
The operation gte
compares two atoms A
and B
with the greater
than or equal
relation, returning true
if A
is greater than or
equal to B
and false
otherwise. The symbol >=
is a synonym for
gte
.
The atoms in Nial are organized as a lattice using <=
for the
ordering. The numeric atoms are comparable across types but numeric and
literal atoms are incomparable. The literal types are not comparable
across types. A comparison between incomparable objects results in
false
.
R := l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER >= R
looooo
lloooo
lllooo
oooloo
oooolo
oooool
'apple' >= 'above'
lllol
"apple >= "above
l
The use of OUTER >=
shows the comparisons between various atom types.
The last two examples show the difference between comparing two strings,
where the operation is distributed by its pervasive property; and
comparing the corresponding phrases.
Definition
gte IS OPERATION A B { B lte A }
hitch
- Class:
construction operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A hitch B
hitch A B
- See Also:
append, link, list, solitary
The operation hitch
attaches A
to the front of the list of items of
B
. It returns a list of length one greater than the tally of B
.
(2 3 4) hitch (5 6 7)
+-----+-+-+-+
|2 3 4|5|6|7|
+-----+-+-+-+
7 hitch 3
7 3
hitch 'Wow' ''
+---+
|Wow|
+---+
The first example shows that the list 2 3 4 becomes an item on the front
of the list 5 6 7. In the next example, the right argument of hitch
is
treated as a list. The last example shows that if the right argument is
an empty list, the result is the left argument as a solitary.
Definition
hitch IS OPERATION A B { solitary A link B }
Equations
A hitch B = A hitch (list B)
A hitch Null = solitary A
list (A hitch B) = A hitch B
not empty A ==> first A hitch rest A = list A
shape A reshape (first A hitch rest A) = A
host
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
host S
- See Also:
edit
The operation host
executes S
as a host command language
instruction. The argument S
is a string or a phrase. If the action
carried out by the host system produces output, the output is displayed
on the screen. In window mode, Q’Nial is unable to capture this output
and hence it may scramble the screen output. The screen is restored by
executing Refresh
.
The result of host
is the fault ?noexpr
if the command has returned
normally; or a fault generated from a system dependent error message
supplied by the host operating system. At the top level loop, a line
beginning with !
, the exclamation mark, is interpreted as a host
command.
if-expr
- Class:
control structure - Usage:
IF C1 THEN Es1 ELSEIF C2 THEN Es2 ... ELSEIF Cn THEN Esn ELSE Esx ENDIF
- See Also:
case-expr, fork
The IF-expr
construct is a notation for executing one of a number of
possible expression sequences Es1
, Es2 , … Esn
. The sequence
selected depends on the result of the conditional expressions C1
, C2 ,
… Cn
. In the general case, whichever condition is first found to
return true
specifies the expression sequence to be performed. If all
the conditional expressions return false
, expression sequence Esx
is
selected. The ELSEIF
and ELSE
clauses are optional.
In the following example, the result is one of phrase Adult
, Minor or
Juvenile
, depending on the value of Age
.
Age := 17;
IF Age > 18 THEN
"Adult
ELSEIF Age < 16 THEN
"Minor
ELSE
"Juvenile
ENDIF
Juvenile
in
- Class:
search operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A in B
in A B
- See Also:
allin, notin, seek, find, equal, sortup
The operation in
returns true
if A
is an item of B
and returns
false
if it is not.
3 in 56 34 23 3 57 3
l
1 1 in tell 3 4
l
`a in 'hello world'
o
`a in "apple
o
`a in string "apple
l
The fourth and fifth examples show that a letter is not an item of a phrase but is an item of the corresponding string.
Definition
in IS OPERATION A B { or (A EACHRIGHT equal B }
Equations
A in B = A in (list B)
A in Null = False
A in solitary A = True
A in (A hitch B) = True
A in (B append A) = True
A in (A pair B) = True
Pragmatics
The operation in
uses a linear search on the items of B
if the array
has not been sorted, or uses a binary search algorithm if it has. The
latter fact suggests that an array that is searched frequently should be
kept in lexicographical order by applying sortup
to it when it is
created.
indexing
The term indexing is used to describe notations that can be used to
select from
or insert into
a variable.
There are four indexing methods in Nial: at
, at all
, at path
and
slice
represented by @
, #
, @@
and |
respectively. The
different indexing methods return different subsets of the array. The
following is a summary of the indexing methods:
Method | Name | Description | |
---|---|---|---|
@ | at | indexes one item | |
# | at all | indexes several items | |
@@ | at path | indexes a part at depth | |
slice | indexes cross-section of items |
Cities := "London "Washington "Ottawa "Moscow "Paris ;
Cities@0
London
Cities#[2,3]
Ottawa Moscow
Alpha := 5 5 reshape 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY'
ABCDE
FGHIJ
KLMNO
PQRST
UVWXY
Alpha@[0,2]
C
Alpha|[1,]
FGHIJ
Alpha|[,1]
BGLQV
Alpha|[,[1,3]]
BD
GI
LN
QS
VX
The following example shows the slightly different structure which
occurs when a comma is either present or missing before the last item.
The library operation findpaths
is used to indicate the path to the
integer 10 in each case.
set "diagram ; Nest1 := [1, 2, [3, 4, 5, [6, 7], 8, 9], 10]
+-+-+-----------------+--+
|1|2|+-+-+-+-----+-+-+|10|
| | ||3|4|5|+-+-+|8|9|| |
| | || | | ||6|7|| | || |
| | || | | |+-+-+| | || |
| | |+-+-+-+-----+-+-+| |
+-+-+-----------------+--+
set "diagram ; Nest2 := [1, 2, [3, 4, 5, [6, 7], 8, 9] 10]
+-+-+----------------------+
|1|2|+-----------------+--+|
| | ||+-+-+-+-----+-+-+|10||
| | |||3|4|5|+-+-+|8|9|| ||
| | ||| | | ||6|7|| | || ||
| | ||| | | |+-+-+| | || ||
| | ||+-+-+-+-----+-+-+| ||
| | |+-----------------+--+|
+-+-+----------------------+
findpaths 10 Nest1
+---+
|+-+|
||3||
|+-+|
+---+
findpaths 10 Nest2
+-----+
|+-+-+|
||2|1||
|+-+-+|
+-----+
(Nest2@@[2,0,3,0])
6
(Nest2@@[2,0,4])
8
Address Validity
The index used in selecting a part of an array must be an expression that evaluates to a valid address. An invalid index returns a fault as follows:
Indexing Method | Fault | |
---|---|---|
A@I | ?address | |
A#I | ?addresses | |
A@@P | ?path | |
A | I | ?slice |
The operation pick
works the same as the at
method of indexing. If
the index is invalid, pick
returns the fault ?address
. Similarly,
choose
works the same as at all
indexing.
3 pick Cities
Moscow
2 3 choose Cities
Ottawa Moscow
10 pick Cities
?address
4 5 6 choose Cities
Paris ?address ?address
infix notation
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
prefix notation
In Nial an operation-expression may be placed between two array-expressions.This is called an infix use of the operation-expression.
7 + 5
12
2 3 reshape 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
In using the infix notation, one must understand that if a sequence of operations are placed between two array arguments, all but the first operation are applied to the second argument.
2 + reverse tell 3
4 3 2
2 (+ reverse tell) 3
3 6
2 (+ reverse) tell 3
2 3 4
inner
- Class:
applicative transformer - Usage:
A INNER [f,g] B
INNER [f,g] A B
- See Also:
outer, innerproduct, solve, inverse
The transformer INNER
generalizes the inner product operation of
linear algebra. For a pair of lists A
and B
, the result is the
application of the reductive operation f
to the result of applying the
binary pervasive operation g
to A
and B
. It is assumed that f
is
one of the seven reductive operations of Nial: sum
, product, or, and,
max, min , or link
and that g
distributes pairwise. For tables,
OUTER g
is applied to the rows of A
and the columns of B
and f
is applied to each item of the outer product.
Thus, INNER [+,*]
is equivalent to matrix multiplication in linear
algebra and INNER [or,and]
is boolean matrix product. For higher
dimensional arrays, the lists are formed by “pushing down” the last axis
of A
and the first axis of B
.
2 3 4 INNER [+,*] 4 5 6
47
loll INNER [or,and] olol
l
A := 2 4 reshape count 8;
B := 4 3 reshape tell 8;
A B
+-------+-----+
|1 2 3 4|0 1 2|
|5 6 7 8|3 4 5|
| |6 7 0|
| |1 2 3|
+-------+-----+
A INNER [sum,times] B
28 38 24
68 94 64
Definition
INNER IS TRANSFORMER f g (OPERATION A B) {
rows A OUTER (f g) (0 split B) }
Equation
shape (A INNER [f,g] B) = (front shape A) link (rest shape B)
innerproduct
- Class:
linear algebra operation - Usage:
A innerproduct B
A ip B
innerproduct A B
ip A B
- See Also:
inner, outer, solve, inverse
The operation innerproduct
computes the mathematical inner product of
real vectors and matrices using special code for efficiency. For real
matrices, it produces the same result as A INNER [+,*] B
, but computes
the result more rapidly for large arguments. It coerces boolean and
integer arrays to reals. The name ip
is provided as an abbreviation.
A := 2 4 reshape count 8;
B := 4 3 reshape tell 8;
A B
+-------+-----+
|1 2 3 4|0 1 2|
|5 6 7 8|3 4 5|
| |6 7 0|
| |1 2 3|
+-------+-----+
A innerproduct B
28. 38. 24.
68. 94. 64.
The number of columns of A
must match the number of rows in B
.
B ip A
?conform in ip
interrupt
- Class:
concept - See Also:
fault triggering, setinterrupts
An interrupt is an event that causes the operating system to suspend its operation and address a requirement of higher priority. Typically, interrupts occur to handle input/output. However, an interrupt also occurs when a fault is detected.
In the default mode of operation of Q’Nial, most fault values are not
created. Rather, an interrupt is triggered. A description of the fault
triggering mechanism is given under fault triggering
.
The user can interrupt execution by pressing <Ctrl-c> <Return>
at the
keyboard in console versions, or clicking on the STOP
button in the
GUI version. This capability can be turned off using setinterrrupts
.
inverse
- Class:
linear algebra operation - Usage:
inverse A
inverse A
- See Also:
solve, inner, innerproduct, outer
The operation inverse
computes the mathematical inverse of a square
matrix A
returning a square matrix of the same shape. If A
is
singular within numerical limits, the result is the fault
?singular
. The name inv
is provided as an abbreviation.
seed 0.5;
A := ceiling ( 100. * (3 3 reshape random 9))
50 44 13
78 74 90
98 67 17
inverse A
-0.0736442 0.00189821 0.0462669
0.115652 -0.00654341 -0.053798
-0.0312664 0.0148461 0.00413593
A innerproduct inverse A
1. -6.93889e-18 -7.11237e-17
9.4369e-16 1. -1.97758e-16
3.60822e-16 -6.93889e-18 1.
The final computation shows that the result is not always an exact inverse due to roundoff errors introduced by using floating point arithmetic.
Equations
A a square matrix ==> A innerproduct (inverse A) innerproduct A = A (within roundoff error)
inverse A innerproduct B = A solve B (within roundoff error)
invocation of QNial
- Class:
concept
QNial is invoked using the following syntax:
SYNTAX: nial [(+|-)size Wssize] [-defs Filename] [-i] [-h]
-size Wssize Begin with a workspace size of Wssize words.
M or K can be used to indicate millions or thousands respectively.
The workspace expands if space is available.
+size Wssize Fix the workspace size at Wssize words with no expansion.
-defs Filenm After loading the initial workspace the file Filenm.ndf
is loaded using loaddefs without displaying it.
-lws Wsname A previously saved workspace file is loaded on startup.
-i Execute in interactive mode with a top level loop.
-h Display command line syntax.
Examples:
nial -i
nial -defs app.ndf
nial +size 50M -defs newfns
isboolean
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isboolean A
- See Also:
type, isinteger, isreal
The operation isboolean
tests whether or not A
is a boolean atom. It
returns true
if A
is a boolean, false
otherwise.
isboolean false
l
isboolean llollool
o
isboolean 7
o
Definition
isboolean IS OPERATION A { type A = o }
ischar
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
ischar A
- See Also:
type, isfault, isphrase, isstring
The operation ischar
tests whether or not atom A
is a character
atom. It returns true
if A
is a character, false
otherwise.
EACH ischar (`a) ('a') 7
loo
In the example 'a'
is not an atom; it is a solitary holding `a
.
Definition
ischar IS OPERATION A { type A = ` }
isfault
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isfault A
- See Also:
type, isphrase, ischar, isstring
The operation isfault
tests whether or not A
is a fault. It returns
true
if A
is a fault, false
otherwise.
EACH isfault (??error) ("?error)
lo
Definition
isfault IS OPERATION A { type A = ?? }
isinteger
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isinteger A
- See Also:
type, isboolean, isreal
The operation isinteger
tests whether or not A
is an integer. It
returns true
if A
is an integer, false
otherwise.
EACH isinteger (7)(2 3 4)(`3)(3.0)
looo
isinteger (`a find 'whale')
l
The last example returns true
because the result of `a find
'whale'
is an integer, since the second argument of find
is a list.
Definition
isinteger IS OPERATION A { type A = 0 }
isphrase
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isphrase A
- See Also:
type, isstring, isfault, ischar
The operation isphrase
tests whether or not A
is a phrase. It
returns true
if A
is a phrase, false
otherwise.
isphrase "Mike
l
isphrase 'abc'
o
isphrase `a
o
Definition
isphrase IS OPERATION A { type A = "" }
isreal
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isreal A
- See Also:
type, isboolean, isinteger
The operation isreal
tests whether or not A
is a real number. It
returns true
if A
is a real number, false
otherwise.
isreal 3.5
l
isreal 'abc'
o
Definition
isreal IS OPERATION A { type A = 0. }
isstring
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
isstring A
- See Also:
ischar, string
The operation isstring
tests whether or not the array A
is a string.
It returns true
if A
is a string, false
otherwise.
isstring 'A string'
l
isstring `A
o
isstring `2 `A `?
l
isstring ''
l
Definition
isstring IS OP A { valence A = 1 and EACH ischar A }
Equations
atomic A ==> isstring string A = True
item
An array A
is said to be an item of array B
if B
holds A
at
one or more locations. The term is a relative one; we cannot speak of
item except in reference to the array that holds it. The items of an
array A are the objects at the locations at the top level.
The number of items in an array is called the tally of the array. Because an array is rectangular, the tally is the product of the shape.
The following names are give to common array structures:
# of items | # of axes | Name |
---|---|---|
0 | 1 | empty list |
1 | 0 | single |
1 | 1 | solitary |
1 | 2 | 1 by 1 table |
2 | 1 | pair |
3 | 1 | triple |
4 | 1 | quadruple |
The arrays of Nial are a recursive data type. That is, the items of an array are also arrays. Since an array has arrays as items, it may contain data at lower levels than the top one. A path is a list of addresses that describes a data object at some depth within the array.
An array is said to be simple if all its items are atomic.
A part of an array is a data object that is contained at some level within the array. The atomic parts of an array are called the leaves of the array. The simple parts are called twigs . The term level is used informally to describe the relative position of a part within the nesting structure of an array. An item is at the first or top level, an item of an item is at the second level, etc.
An empty array is one that has no items.
iterate
- Class:
control structure transformer - Usage:
ITERATE f A
- See Also:
each, for-loop, fork
The transformer ITERATE
is used to apply the operation f
sequentially to the items of A
in row major order. (Row major order
means across the rows moving left to right, starting at the top row and
then going down the rows. An example is given under list.) The result is
the result of applying f
to the final item. If A
has no items, the
result is the fault ?noexpr
.
ITERATE write "Hello "out "there.
Hello
out
there.
A IS EXTERNAL VARIABLE;
accum IS OPERATION B {
NONLOCAL A; A := A + B };
A := 20;
ITERATE accum 3 4 5 ; A
32
In the second example, the operation accum
increments variable A
by
the argument value. The example shows ITERATE
being used to apply
accum
to the list 3 4 5, which results in A
having the values 23, 27
and 32.
With ITERATE
, an operation that has a side effect can be applied to an
array of arguments sequentially in a specific sequence. On the other
hand, the order of application is undefined for EACH
.
A second major difference between EACH
and ITERATE
is that ITERATE
returns only the result of the last application whereas EACH
returns
the array of all the results.
Definition
ITERATE IS TR f OPERATION A { FOR X WITH A DO f A ENDFOR }
juxtaposition
- Class:
syntax
The syntax rules for simple-expressions show three uses of the side-by-side or juxtapositional notation of Nial: strand formation, prefix operation application and infix operation application. There are no syntactic restrictions as to whether or not a particular operation may be applied in infix or prefix form. A fault is returned at run time if an operation is used inappropriately.
Summary of Juxtapositional Syntax
The following table illustrates the uses of juxtaposition in Nial, where
A
and B
are array-expressions, f
and g
are
operation-expressions, and T
is a transformer:
Form | Name | Object |
---|---|---|
A B | strand | array |
A f | currying | operation |
f A | prefix use | array |
f g | composition | operation |
T f | transform | operation |
A f B | infix use | array |
T f A | transform use | array |
laminate
- Class:
construction operation - Usage:
I laminate A
laminate I A
- See Also:
link, catenate
The operation laminate
merges the items of A
adding a new axis
before axis I
of the items. The items of A
must be of the same
shape.
The following example creates a three dimensional array from two tables, placing the new axes at the front:
0 laminate (tell 2 3) (count 2 3)
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2| |1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2| |2 1|2 2|2 3|
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
Definition
laminate IS OPERATION I A {
IF equal EACH shape A THEN
Axesofitems := axes first A;
link (I take Axesofitems) (I drop Axesofitems + 1) blend A
ELSE
fault '?conform error in laminate'
ENDIF }
last
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
last A
- See Also:
first, pick, take
The operation last
returns the last of the items of A
. If A
is
empty, it returns the fault ?address
. The operation last
is a
special case of pick
(because first
is defined in terms of pick
)
and its behaviour is determined by that of pick
. Every nonempty array
has a last item.
last 4 5 6
6
last tell 3 4
2 3
Definition
last IS OPERATION A { first reverse A }
Equations
last single A = A
last solitary A = A
last list A = last A
latent
- Class:
user defined expression - Usage:
Latent
- See Also:
load, save
The expression Latent
is used to name an expression to be executed
without user intervention when the workspace is loaded. Latent
is used
in closed applications so that an application can be started when the
workspace is loaded. Latent
can establish any default or initial
conditions desired.
Latent IS {
settrigger o;
set "log;
StartApp;
Bye; }
In the example, Latent
is defined to turn of triggering of faults, to
turn on session logging, to start the application and then to terminate
the session.
leaf
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
LEAF f A
- See Also:
twig, each, content
The transformer LEAF
modifies an operation f
into an operation that
applies f to every atom of the argument A
. The result of applying
LEAF f
to A
has the same shape as A
. If f
maps atoms to atoms,
the result has the same structure as A
.
A := tell 2 3
+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|
+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|
+---+---+---+
LEAF tally A
+---+---+---+
|1 1|1 1|1 1|
+---+---+---+
|1 1|1 1|1 1|
+---+---+---+
B := (2 3) (1 2)
+---+---+
|2 3|1 2|
+---+---+
LEAF tell B
+-----------+-------+
|+---+-----+|+-+---+|
||0 1|0 1 2|||0|0 1||
|+---+-----+|+-+---+|
+-----------+-------+
The first example shows that the result of applying a LEAF
transform
to a table is a table of the same shape. The atoms have been mapped to 1
since the tally of an atom is 1. The second example shows that applying
a LEAF
transform to a list gives a list of the same length. However,
the structure of the result is not preserved in this example because
tell
maps an integer to a list of integers.
Definition
LEAF IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
IF atomic A THEN
f A
ELSE
EACH (LEAF f) A
ENDIF }
Equations
shape LEAF f A = shape A
f unary pervasive ==> LEAF f A = f A
(LEAF f) (LEAF g) A = LEAF (f g) A
LEAF f list A = list LEAF f A
level
The term level is used informally to describe the relative position of a part within the nesting structure of an array. An item is at the first or top level, an item of an item is at the second level, etc.
An atom is viewed in two ways. As an indivisible data object it is viewed as having no levels and cannot be broken into subarrays. As an array data structure it is viewed as a single holding itself and therefore has an infinity of levels. This view is necessary for atomic arrays to fit the theory of nested array mathematics.
The number of levels to reach an atom along each path need not be the same. For example, in the following array, the phrase “hello is at the first level, the integer 23 is at the second level and the character `b is at the third level.
[ 23 'abc', "hello , tell 2 2 ]
+------------+-----+-------------+
|+--+-------+|hello|+-----+-----+|
||23|+-+-+-+|| ||+-+-+|+-+-+||
|| ||a|b|c||| |||0|0|||0|1|||
|| |+-+-+-+|| ||+-+-+|+-+-+||
|+--+-------+| |+-----+-----+|
| | ||+-+-+|+-+-+||
| | |||1|0|||1|1|||
| | ||+-+-+|+-+-+||
| | |+-----+-----+|
+------------+-----+-------------+
Some of the operations of Nial that operate on simple arrays are
extended to arbitrarily nested arrays by being applied to the atoms at
the deepest level. These are called pervasive
operations.
libpath
- Class:
system variable - Usage:
Libpath := Paths
- See Also:
library
The variable Libpath
is used by the operation library
as a list of
paths to directories that are to be checked for the definition file
named in the library
argument. The directories defined by Libpath
are searched before the system dependent library directories.
When you call ‘library name’ each directory in sequence in your libpath will be joined to ‘name’ with the appropriate os path separator and tried. (with .ndf addded if necessary). so it depends on ‘open’. Names that include ‘.’ or ‘..’ will work but shell expansions like ‘~’ or ‘$abc’ will not. If you want to make it relative to your home directory then use the nial expression ‘os_get_parameter 2’, Different operating systems use different environment variable names for the home directory (HOME, USER etc)
Libpath := ['mydefs','mylib\newdefs'];
library
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
library Nm
library Nm Sw
- See Also:
loaddefs, libpath, host, standard definitions
The operation library
loads a definition from the Q’Nial library of
definition files. Nm
is the name of a library file as a phrase or
string. The name is augmented with the path information for the library
and loaded into the workspace using loaddefs
.
Sw
, an optional argument, is either 0 (the default) or 1. If Sw
is
0, there is no display of the file as it is loaded. If Sw
is 1, the
file is displayed as the file is read.
Some of the programs in the library are grouped in definition files by function. When such a file is specified, all the definitions in the file are loaded. If it is desired to load only one operation from a definition file which contains several operations, it is necessary to edit the library file in order to isolate the desired operation in one file.
library "labeltable
Library
searches for files using paths that are provided in its
definition. Before searching for system defined directories, it searches
in the directories named in the global variable Libpath
, which is
empty by default.
To modify Libpath, either edit the standard definitions file defs.ndf
,
or assign it a value dynamically.
like
- Class:
set-like operation - Properties:
binary, predicate - Usage:
A like B
like A B
- See Also:
allin, diverse, in, notin
The operation like
compares two arrays A
and B
and returns true
if all the items of A
are items of B
and vice versa. Otherwise it
returns false
. The operation like
corresponds to set equality at the
first level of nesting.
2 3 like 3 2 2 3 2
l
2 3 like 3 2 4
o
'hello world' like 'whole door'
l
Definition
like IS OPERATION A B { (A allin B) and (B allin A)}
link
- Class:
construction operation - Property:
reductive - Usage:
link A
A link B
- See Also:
catenate, laminate, hitch, list, append, content, cull
The operation link
returns the list of the items of the items of its
argument. If it is applied to a pair of arrays A
and B
, the result
is the items of A
followed by the items of B
.
If link is applied to an arbitrary array A
, the items of the first
item of A
are followed by the items of the second item of A
, etc.
If A
is empty, the result is Null
. If A
is not empty but there are
no items in all the items of A
, the result is also Null
.
2 3 5 4 7 2 link 2 4 6 8
2 3 5 4 7 2 2 4 6 8
link 'hen' 'hello' 'eh'
henhelloeh
The first example shows that the link of two lists of length 6 and 4 is a list of length 10. The second example illustrates the linking of three strings.
Link
is similar to a set-union operation, although it does not remove
duplicates in the representation. The composition of cull
with link
may be more appropriate as a union operation.
Equations
link A = link list A
link A = list link A
link A = EACH list link A
tally link A = sum EACH tally A
link solitary A = list A
link Null = Null
link EACH link A = link link A
cart link A = EACH link cart EACH cart A
EACH f link A = link EACH EACH f A
simple A ==> link A = list A
and EACH simple A ==> content A = link A
list
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
list A
- See Also:
reshape, link
The operation list
returns the list of the items of A
in row major
order.
A := 2 3 4 reshape count 24
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24
list A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24
set "diagram; list "abc
+---+
|abc|
+---+
The first example shows row major order for a table. The second example shows that the list of an atom is the solitary holding the atom.
Definition
list IS OPERATION A { tally A reshape A }
Equations
shape list A = tally A
list list A = list A
list single A = solitary A
EACH f list A = list EACH f A
empty A ==> list A = Null
ln
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
ln A
- See Also:
exp, log
The operation ln
implements the natural logarithm function of
mathematics. It produces the following results when applied to atoms of
the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | natural logarithm of the corresponding real |
integer | natural logarithm of the corresponding real |
real | real natural logarithm if A > 0.0; ?ln if A <= 0.0 |
character | fault ?ln |
phrase | fault ?ln |
fault | argument A |
ln l 2 3.5 `a "abc ??error
0. 0.693147 1.25276 ?ln ?ln ?error
Equation
A > 0 ==> exp ln A = A (within roundoff error)
load
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
load Wsname
- See Also:
save, loaddefs, library,latent
The operation load
is used to retrieve the saved workspace named by
the phrase or string Wsname
. The convention in Q’Nial is to save
workspaces with a file name extension of the form .nws
to make it easy
to identify workspace files in the file system. When saving or loading a
workspace, the extension may be omitted.
The effect of loading a workspace is to replace the current workspace
with the saved one. To keep the contents of the current workspace,
save
should be used prior to doing a load
.
The operation load
may be used within a defined expression or
operation. However, in such a use, it interrupts the execution of the
operation or expression and does the load as though the operation were
entered at top level.
If a workspace contains an expression with the name Latent
, load
executes Latent
when the load is complete. This mechanism can be used
to have the load of a workspace automatically begin an application or to
chain execution of workspaces.
There is no mechanism to obtain individual objects saved in a workspace.
load "mywork
loaddefs
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
loaddefs Deffilename
loaddefs Deffilename Mode
- See Also:
library, edit
The operation loaddefs
is used to load Nial actions (definitions or
expressions) from the file named by the phrase or string Deffilename
.
The convention in Q’Nial is to name Nial definition files with a file
name extension of the form .ndf
to make it easy to identify such files
in the file system.
When loading a file with loaddefs
, the file extension may be omitted.
The operation may have an optional second argument to specify the mode
of loading. If mode is 0 or if it is omitted, the actions are not
displayed as they are processed. If it is 1, the actions are displayed.
The file of actions consists of groups of lines that are treated as a unit. These lines are separated by a blank line. If the first character in the first line of the group is
Several lines, up to a blank line, are treated as one long line. No blank spaces are inserted between the end of one line and the beginning of another. Thus, care should be taken to ensure that identifiers are not joined together.
If a syntax error is detected when a definition is being loaded, the
definition is not installed. The absence of the erroneous definition may
cause subsequent definitions in the file to fail also. If any errors are
detected, the number of errors is displayed when loaddefs
ends. Only
the first syntax error found in each action is reported.
The backslash character, ` `, which is used to continue a line of a definition in immediate mode, must not be inserted at the end of lines in a definition file.
The tab characters, if they exist in a definition file, are treated as though they are space characters. Since some editor programs insert tabs automatically, the display of the file on input may be different from the display using the editor.
A definition file may contain uses of loaddefs
. For a large
application with many definition files, it is a good idea to have one
file which can construct the application by using loaddefs
to bring in
the other files in an appropriate order. Loaddefs
can also be used to
execute a script of Nial expressions. This feature is convenient when
simulating a Q’Nial session and capturing its output in a log file.
local environment
- Class:
concept - See Also:
global environment, scope of a variable
A local environment is a collection of associations that are known within a limited section of program text. These limited sections are formed by blocks, operation-forms and transformer-forms as discussed in the relevant sections below. A name that has a local association in one of these forms is said to have local scope.
Program fragments in which local variables are being assigned can be nested, so that one local scope surrounds another. A local association is not visible outside the construct in which it is defined; and a name with local scope can hide associations that the name has in surrounding scopes.
At any point in a program fragment, there is a current environment consisting of all names whose associations are visible. It includes the names having local scope in the program fragment being executed, names that are visible in the surrounding scopes and names that have global scope.
In program text, the scope of all names is determined by the static structure of the program text. The one exception is text that has the operation execute applied to it under program control.
In a local environment, a variable identifier can be chosen the same as a predefined or user-defined global definition name. Such a choice makes the global use of the name unavailable in the local context.
In any context, an identifier can name only one of: a variable, an array- expression, an operation-expression, or a transformer-expression. During one session, the role of a name, i.e. the class of syntactic object it names, cannot be changed.
If a block is used as a primary-expression, the local environment created by a block is determined by the block itself. If it is the body of an operation-form, the local environment includes the formal parameter names of the operation-form as variables.
A block delimits a local environment. It allows new uses of names which do not interfere with uses of those names outside the block. For example, within a block, a predefined operation name can be redefined and used for a different purpose. Only the reserved words of Q’Nial cannot be reused in this fashion. Definitions that appear within the block have local scope. That is, the definitions can be referenced only in the body of the block. Variables assigned within the block may or may not have local scope, depending on the appearance of a local and/or a nonlocal declaration. If there is no declaration, all assigned variables have local scope. Declaring some variables as local does not change the effect on undeclared variables that are used on the left of assignment. They are automatically localized.
If a nonlocal declaration is used, an assigned name that is on the nonlocal list is sought in surrounding scopes. If the name is not found, a variable is created in the global environment.
During the parse of the assign-expression appearing in a block, each name on the variable list is sought in the local environment. If the name exists in the local environment, the assignment affects the local association. If a name does not exist in the local environment and no reference has been made to a nonlocal variable with the same name, a local variable is created in the block. An assign-expression parsed in the global environment creates a global variable if a variable with that name does not already exist.
An operation-form defines a local environment. The formal parameter
names are names of local variables. If the body of the operation form is
a block, the local environment of the block is extended to include the
formal parameters. When the operation is applied, the formal parameter
names are assigned from the value of the actual argument. If there is
only one formal parameter, the actual argument is assigned to it as a
whole; otherwise, the items of the actual argument are assigned to the
formal parameters in corresponding order. If there is a length mismatch
between the list of formal parameter names and the values of the actual
argument, the fault ?op_parameter
is returned.
The value of the application of the operation is the value of the body
of the operation-form, which is evaluated with the local variables in
the parameter list assigned as described above. In determining the
association for a name that appears in the body of an operation form,
Q’Nial looks for the name in the local environment. If the name is not
found locally, the name is sought in surrounding environments until it
is found or until the global environment is searched. If it is not
found, a fault ?unknown identifier:
is given when the operation-form
is analyzed (parsed).
Operation-forms are most frequently used in definitions where they are given an associated name. However, an operation-form can appear directly in an expression provided it is enclosed in parentheses. In this usage, it can be an argument to a transformer name or can be applied to an array argument.
The operation execute
can be used within the execution of a block to
make an assignment to variables or to invoke the definition mechanism.
If execute
is used to make a new definition or to create a new
variable, the resulting variable or definition is placed in the global
environment. However, if the block has local variables or local
definitions, execute can be used to change a local version dynamically.
A similar situation occurs with dynamic alteration of variables using
assign
.
log
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
log A
- See Also:
power, ln
The operation log
implements the base 10 logarithm function of
mathematics. It produces the following results when applied to atoms of
the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | base 10 logarithm of the corresponding real |
integer | base 10 logarithm of the corresponding real |
real | real base 10 logarithm if A > 0.0; ?log if A <= 0.0 |
character | fault ?log |
phrase | fault ?log |
fault | argument A |
log l 2 3.5 `a "abc ??error
0. 0.30103 0.544068 ?log ?log ?error
Equation
A > 0 ==> 10. power log A = A (within roundoff error)
log file
- Class:
feature - See Also:
setlogname
Q’Nial provides a facility to record the actions in a session in a text
file. The default name for the log file is auto.nlg
. Logging is
initiated by:
set "log
nolog
Logging is ended by:
set "nolog
log
The log file name can be changed using:
setlogname "newname
auto.nlg
A log file is opened and closed on each usage by the internal logging
routine. As a result, the log file is always available if the session is
terminated unexpectedly. If a file with the name of the log file exists
when set "log
is executed, the logging information is appended at the
end.
lower
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
N lower A
lower N A
- See Also:
raise, mix, blend, rank
The operation lower
is used to partition an array A
along its axes
by indicating that the last N
axes are to become axes of the items of
the result. The remaining axes become the axes of the result. N must be
an integer in the range from 0 to valence A
. The result is an array of
shape given by dropping the last N
items of shape A
. The items of
the result have the shape given by taking the last N
items of shape
A
. Thus, the 1 lower
of an array of shape 3 4 2 is a 3 by 4 table of
pairs. The 2 lower
of the same array is a triple of 4 by 2 tables.
A := 3 4 2 reshape 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX'
AB IJ QR
CD KL ST
EF MN UV
GH OP WX
1 lower A
+--+--+--+--+
|AB|CD|EF|GH|
+--+--+--+--+
|IJ|KL|MN|OP|
+--+--+--+--+
|QR|ST|UV|WX|
+--+--+--+--+
2 lower A
+--+--+--+
|AB|IJ|QR|
|CD|KL|ST|
|EF|MN|UV|
|GH|OP|WX|
+--+--+--+
Definition
lower IS OPERATION A { valence A - N raise A }
Equations
N a nonnegative integer <= valence A and not empty A ==> shape (N lower A) = opp N drop shape A
shape first (N drop A) = opp N take shape A ==> mix (N lower A) = A
lt
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A lt B
A < B
lt A B
< A B
- See Also:
lte, gt, gte, match, mate, max, sort
The operation lt
compares two atoms A
and B
with the less than
relation, returning true
if A
is less than B
and false
otherwise. Symbol <
is a synonym for lt
.
The atoms in Nial are organized as a lattice using <=
for the
ordering. The numeric atoms are comparable across types but literal
atoms are not comparable with numeric atoms. The literal types are not
comparable across types. A comparison between incomparable objects
results in false
.
R := l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER < R
ollooo
oolooo
oooooo
oooooo
oooooo
oooooo
'apple' < 'above'
ooolo
"apple < "above
o
The use of OUTER <
shows the comparisons between various atom types.
The last two examples show the difference between comparing two strings,
where the operation is distributed by its pervasive property; and
comparing the corresponding phrases.
Definition
lt IS OPERATION A B ( ( A lte B ) and not ( A mate B ) )
lte
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A lte B
A <= B
lte A B
<= A B
- See Also:
lt, gt, gte, match, mate, max, sort
The operation lte
compares two atoms A
and B
with the less than
or equal
relation, returning true
if A
is less than B
and false
otherwise. The symbol <=
is a synonym for lte
.
The atoms in Nial are organized as a lattice using <=
for the
ordering. The numeric atoms are comparable across types but numeric and
literal atoms are incomparable. The literal types are not comparable
across types. A comparison between incomparable objects results in
false
.
R := l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER <= R
lllooo
ollooo
oolooo
oooloo
oooolo
oooool
'apple' <= 'above'
loolo
"apple < "above
o
The use of OUTER <=
shows the comparisons between various atom types.
The last two examples show the difference between comparing two strings,
where the operation is distributed by its pervasive property; and
comparing the corresponding phrases.
match
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A match B
match A B
- See Also:
mate, gt, gte, lt, lte
The operation match
compares two atoms A
and B
for exact equality,
returning true
if A
is equal to B
and false
otherwise. Match
cannot be used to determine the equality of atoms of different numeric
or literal type, as when comparing the real number 3.0 with the integer
3.
3 match 3
l
3.0 match 3
o
"o match `o
o
1.0 match l 1 1.0
ool
` match 'a list of letters'
olooooloolooooooo
1 match tell 2 3
+--+--+--+
|oo|ol|oo|
+--+--+--+
|lo|ll|lo|
+--+--+--+
The second last example shows that the binary pervasive extension of
match
allows a lists of atoms to be compared for a value, returning a
bitstring of results. The last example shows where in the structure of
tell 2 3 a 1 is held.
mate
- Class:
comparison operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A mate B
mate A B
- See Also:
match, gt, gte, lt, lte
The operation mate
compares two atoms A
and B
for equality with
type coercion, returning true
if A
is equal to or can be coerced to
B
as a number; and false
otherwise. Mate
is used to determine the
equality of atoms of different numeric type, as when comparing the real
number 3.0 with the integer 3. It cannot be used to determine equality
of literal types.
3 mate 3
l
3.0 mate 3
l
"o mate `o
o
1.0 mate l 1 1.0
lll
The last example shows that the binary pervasive extension of mate
allows a lists of atoms to be compared for a value, returning a
bitstring of results.
Definition
mate IS OPERATION A B { (A lte B) and (B lte A) }
max
- Class:
comparison operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
max A
A max B
- See Also:
min, gte, sort
The operation max
, when applied to a simple array A
, finds the least
atom that is greater than or equal to all the items. If the atoms of A
are all positive numbers, for example, max A
returns the biggest. If
the items are not comparable, the result is the fault ?I
, the atom in
the lattice of Nial atoms that is greater than or equal to all other
atoms (the zenith). If A is empty, the result is the fault ?O
, the
atom that is less than or equal to all other atoms (the nadir).
Max
is extended to arbitrary arrays by its multi pervasive behaviour.
It is a reductive operation in that it reduces a simple array to a
single atom. Applied to a pair of simple arrays, it produces a simple
array with the corresponding items compared.
If the items of A
are all numeric type, they are comparable. The
result is the highest numeric type represented in the array, where
boolean is the lowest numeric type and real number is the highest.
max 3 45 23 18 3.5
45.
max 3 "abc
?I
max "abc "def "c
def
max 'apples' 'orange'
orpngs
The first example shows that max
of a list of numbers of different
type is the maximum number, coerced to the highest type. The second
shows that the integer 3 and the phrase “abc” are incomparable and the
result is the fault ?I. The third example shows that phrases are
directly comparable. The last shows that strings are compared on a
character by character basis.
Equations
A max B = B max A
max EACH max A =f= max link A
atomic A ==> max B lte A = and (B EACHLEFT lte A)
max Null = ??O
min
- Class:
comparison operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
min A
A min B
- See Also:
max, lte, sort
The operation min
, when applied to a simple array A
, finds the
greatest atom that is less than or equal to all the items. If the atoms
of A
are all positive numbers, for example, min A
returns the
smallest number. If the items are not comparable, the result is the
fault ?O
, the atom in the lattice of Nial atoms that is less than or
equal to all other atoms (the nadir). If A
is empty, the result is the
fault ?I
, the atom that is greater than or equal to all other atoms
(the zenith).
Min
is extended to arbitrary arrays by its multi pervasive behaviour.
It is a reductive operation in that it reduces a simple array to a
single atom. Applied to a pair of simple arrays, it produces a simple
array with the corresponding items compared.
If the items of A
are all numeric type, they are comparable. The
result is the highest numeric type represented in the array, where
boolean is the lowest numeric type and real number is the highest.
min 3 45 23 18 3.5
3.
min 3 "abc
?O
min "abc "def "c
abc
min 'apples' 'orange'
apalee
The first example shows that min
of a list of numbers of different
type is the minimum number, coerced to the highest type. The second
shows that the integer 3 and the phrase “abc” are incomparable and the
result is the fault ?I
. The third example shows that phrases are
directly comparable. The last shows that strings are compared on a
character by character basis.
Equations
A min B = B min A
min EACH min A = min link A
atomic A ==> A lte min B = and (A EACHRIGHT lte B)
min Null = ??I
minus
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A minus B
A - B
minus A B
- See Also:
plus, sum, opposite
The operation minus
returns the result of subtracting two numeric
atoms. It coerces the type of the atoms to be the higher type, if they
differ; or to integer, if both are boolean. The result is of the type of
the coerced arguments.
The symbol -
is a synonym for minus
. Care must be taken when using
this symbol because it also is used to form negative constants and the
latter use has higher priority. Thus,
A := 10;
A - 1
9
does a subtraction, but
A -1
10 -1
forms a pair.
If one argument is numeric and the other is a fault or if both arguments
are the same fault, the answer is the fault. In all other cases when one
or more of the arguments is not numeric, the result is the arithmetic
fault ?A
.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER minus R
0 -1 -1.5 ?A ?A ?error
1 0 -0.5 ?A ?A ?error
1.5 0.5 0. ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
The above example illustrates all combinations of atom types for the two
arguments to minus
.
Equations
0 minus A = opposite A
A minus B = A plus opposite B
mix
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
mix A
- See Also:
blend, link, rows, rank
The operation mix
is intended to be used on an array A
with items
which are all the same shape. In this case, the shape of the result is
formed by the shape of A
linked with the shape of the items. The list
of items of the result is the link of the items of A
. If A
does not
have equally shaped items, the fault ?conform
is returned.
mix (2 3) (4 5) (6 7)
2 3
4 5
6 7
A := (tell 2 3)(count 2 3)
+-------------+-------------+
|+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
||0 0|0 1|0 2|||1 1|1 2|1 3||
|+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
||1 0|1 1|1 2|||2 1|2 2|2 3||
|+---+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
+-------------+-------------+
mix A
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2| |1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2| |2 1|2 2|2 3|
+---+---+---+ +---+---+---+
The first example shows that the result of mixing a triple of pairs is a 3 by 2 table. The second example shows that mixing a pair of 2 by 3 tables is a 2 by 2 by 3 array, with the tables as the planes of the array.
The operation mix
is the left inverse of the operations rows
and
raise
for nonempty arrays. It is often used to transform from a list
of lists
view of data to a table view of data. In practice,
transformations between the two representations on large arrays should
be avoided in Q’Nial since considerable work is involved in doing the
restructuring.
Definition
mix IS OPERATION A {
IF empty A THEN
shape A append 0 reshape A
ELSEIF not equal EACH shape A THEN
??conform
ELSE
shape A link shape first A reshape link A
ENDIF }
Equations
not empty A and equal EACH shape A ==> shape mix A = link (shape A)(shape first A)
equal EACH shape A ==> list mix A = link A
not empty A ==> mix rows A = A
I in (axes A + 1) and not empty A ==> mix (I raise A) = A
mod
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A mod B
mod A B
- See Also:
quotient, ceiling, floor
The operation mod
returns the remainder of dividing integer A
by
integer B
. If the divisor B
is zero, the result is A
. If it is
negative, the result is the fault ?negative divisor
.
The operation mod
coerces a boolean argument to an integer. It
produces a fault if either argument is not an integer or a boolean.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER mod R
0 1 ?A ?A ?A ?error
0 0 ?A ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
(5 mod 3)(-5 mod 3)(5 mod -3)(5 mod 0)
2 1 ?negative divisor 5
The first example illustrates all combinations of atom types for the two
arguments to mod
.
The remainder on division by a positive integer B
is always a number
between 0 and B - 1
. If A
is negative, the integer returned obeys
the rule of modular arithmetic as described in the definition. The
result of A mod 0
is A
rather than a fault, since that is the
preferred result in mathematics.
Definition
mod IS OPERATION A B { floor (A - (B * (A quotient B)) ) }
Equation
isinteger A ==> A mod 0 = A
mold
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
A mold B
mold A B
- See Also:
take
The operation mold
is provided for backward compatibility with earlier
versions of Nial. The current definition is a synonym for take
. The
previous definition was a reshaping operation that was almost always
used on lists and take
has the same effect as the previous definition
on lists.
Definition
mold is take
multi pervasive
- Class:
operation property - Usage:
f A
f A B ... C
- See Also:
unary pervasive, binary pervasive, pervasive, reductive, eachall, reduce, pack
Each operation f
in this class reduces a simple array (an array of
atoms) to an atom.
A multi pervasive operation maps an array having items of identical structure to one with the same structure, applying the operation to the simple arrays formed from all the atoms in corresponding positions in the atoms.
There are six operations in this class. They are the reductive operations of arithmetic and logic.
If a multi pervasive operation is applied to an array that does not have
items of the same shape, the effect is to build a conformable pair by
replicating an atom or solitary item of the array to the common shape of
the other items. If two or more of the items have tally different from
one and are of unequal shape, the fault ?conform
is returned. On a
pair, a multi pervasive operation behaves the same way as a binary
pervasive operation does.
sum [3 4 5 6 , 5 , 7 8 9 10] = 15 17 19 21
l
The following table describes the multi pervasive operations.
Operation | Function |
---|---|
and | logical “and” of a boolean array |
max | highest item in the array |
min | lowest item in the array |
or | logical “or” of a boolean array |
product | arithmetic product of an array of numbers |
sum | arithmetic sum of an array of numbers |
Equations
f A = EACHALL f A
f A = EACH f pack A
shape f A = shape pack A
f A = REDUCE f A
nested definition
- Class:
concept - See Also:
block, definition
A nested definition is one that appears in a definition sequence within a block. Its name is a local definition name. If the name is also used outside the block, the external meaning is not known in the block.
Nested definitions can be used to encapsulate support definitions within a larger definition that is to be made available to other users. This avoids cluttering up the name space with names that might interfere with the user’s other work. It is often easier to develop the large definition without encapsulation and package it in encapsulated form once the design is completed.
next
The command next
is used in debugging a definition that has been
suspended using Break or <Ctrl B>. The effect of next
is to execute
the next expression in an expression sequence and to suspend execution
again. If the current expression involves a call on a defined operation
or expression, execution of the entire definition is completed and
execution is suspended on the expression after the current one. If the
current expression is the last one in the expression sequence where the
break began, the effect is the same as using resume
.
The related command nextv
displays the result of the expression
executed on a step before displaying the next expression.
no_expr
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
No_expr
- See Also:
no_value, no_op, no_tr
The expression No_expr returns the fault ?missing_expr
. It is the
default value for an expression name declared to be external
or that
has been erased.
no_op
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
no_op A
- See Also:
no_value, no_expr, no_tr
The operation no_op
returns the fault ?missing_op
when applied to
any array A
. It is the default value for an operation name declared to
be external or that has been erased.
no_tr
- Class:
system transformer - Usage:
no_tr f A
- See Also:
no_value, no_expr, no_op
The transformer NO_TR
transforms any operation f
to an operation
that returns the fault ?missing_tr
when applied to any array A
. It
is the default value for a transformer name declared to be external or
that has been erased.
no_value
- Class:
system constant - Usage:
?no_value
- See Also:
no_expr, no_op, no_tr
The fault ?no_value
is a special fault value used as the default value
of variables that have been declared external or that have been erased.
not
- Class:
logic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
not A
- See Also:
and, or, true, false, isboolean, notin
The operation not
reverses the value of a boolean. It returns true
if A
is false
and false
if A
is true
. If A
is any other
atom, the result is the logical fault ?L
.
not l
o
not lollo
olool
not 2 "abc o
?L ?L l
Equations
not not not A = not A
not and A =f= or EACH not A
not or A =f= and EACH not A
notin
- Class:
search operation - Properties:
binary, predicate - Usage:
A notin B
notin A B
- See Also:
in, not, allin, unequal
The operation notin
returns true
if A
is not an item of B
and
returns false
if it is.
3 notin 56 34 23 3 57 3
o
4 1 notin tell 3 4
l
`a notin 'hello world'
l
`a notin "apple
l
Definition
notin IS OPERATION A B { not (A in B) }
Equation
A notin B = A notin list B
null
- Class:
constant expression - Usage:
Null
- See Also:
empty, atomic
The expression Null
denotes the empty list. It is the array returned
as the shape of a single and is equal to the empty string. The empty
list notation ` [ ] also denotes the empty list
Null`.
Null = shape 5
l
Null = []
l
Null = ''
l
Since there is an empty array for each shape containing a zero, unless
you are certain A
is a list, the test: A = Null
should not be used
in place of empty A
.
set "sketch; Null
set "diagram; Null
+
|
+
Null
is not displayed when sketch display mode is set. In diagram mode
it is displayed as the left border of a list diagram.
A selection operation such as pick
or first
applied to Null
results in the fault ?address
.
Definition
Null IS shape 0
Equations
shape single A = Null
shape Null = 0
atomic A ==> Null = shape A
numeric
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
numeric A
- See Also:
type, isinteger, isreal, ischar
The operation numeric
tests whether or not A
is a numeric atom. It
returns true
if A
is a boolean atom, an integer atom or a real atom,
false
otherwise.
numeric 3.5
l
numeric l 45 3.78
o
numeric Null
o
Definition
numeric IS OPERATION A { isboolean A or isinteger A or isreal A }
numeric type hierarchy
The three numeric types: boolean, integer and real, are organized in a hierarchy in the order mentioned. For arithmetic and comparative binary operations, if the types of arguments are both numeric but differ in type, they are coerced to the higher of the two types. For example, if you add an integer to a real number, say 3 + 4.5, the integer is coerced to 3.0 and a real number addition is done. Boolean atoms are always coerced to integers if they are used with arithmetic operations.
There are six types of atoms in Nial. They are boolean, integer, real, character, phrase and fault. The first three are numeric types and are used for arithmetic operations. The last three are literal types and are used for symbol manipulation. All six types of atoms are used in comparisons.
A boolean atom is the result of a comparison of array values; or the result of a test relating to a characteristic of an array or the content of an array. There are two boolean atoms: true and false, denoted by l and o respectively. When booleans are treated as numbers, true corresponds to one and false to zero.
An integer atom is a positive or negative whole number representing a quantity of units. A dash symbol (-) immediately preceding the integer denotes a negative integer. No space is permitted between the dash and the number, otherwise the dash is interpreted as the arithmetical operation of subtraction. Conversely, a space is required when subtraction is intended. An integer is represented by an internal form that limits its range of values in the Q’Nial implementation of Nial.
A real atom is a number which can represent any position on the real line. It may be written with a fractional part and/or with a decimal exponent. It is represented internally by a floating point number.
open
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
open Filename Mode
- See Also:
close, readfile, writefile, readarray, writearray, readrecord, writerecord
The operation open
prepares the host file named by the phrase or
string Filename
for use in one of seven possible modes. Mode
is a
character, string or phrase encoding the mode as
follows:
Mode | Mode Name | Description |
---|---|---|
r | read | existing sequential text file, read only |
w | write | create sequential text file, write only |
a | append | existing sequential text file, write only starting at the end |
d | direct | existing or new binary file, direct access for both read and write |
c | communication | existing or new sequential text file, for both read and write |
pr | pipe read | output from the command Filename is available |
pw | pipe write | input to the command Filename is provided |
In read
, write, append or communication
modes, Filename
must
include the file extension, if any. In direct mode, two host files are
opened, one with extension .ndx
and the other with extension .rec
,
standing for index
and record
, respectively. In this mode,
Filename
is the root of the file name, without any extension.
The communication
mode can be used with special forms of readfile
and writefile
usage to access a special device or a communications
port. This mode is available only on the EXTDOS Version of Nial.
The pipe modes treat the Filename
as a host command. The open
causes
the command to be executed. In pipe read
, the output from the command
is obtained using readfile
; in pipe write
, input to the command is
provided using writefile
.
The result of open
is a file designator, an integer specifying an
input/output port. This value is used in later references to the file.
The effect of open
may be system dependent. If the file exists and can
be opened by the user in the requested mode, the result will be the file
designator. If it cannot be opened or does not exist, the result will be
a fault message generated from the error message provided by the host
system. For portable programs, the specific fault message should not be
used in an equality test. The result of an open should be tested for a
fault value using isfault
to catch unexpected failures.
operation
- Class:
concept - See Also:
expression, transformer
An operation is a functional object that is given an argument array
and returns a result array. The process of executing an operation by
giving it an argument value is called an operation call
or an
operation application
.
An operation can be constructed by defining one or more parameters and giving an algorithm to compute the result in terms of the parameters. An operation is usually given a name when it is defined. There are also program fragments that construct unnamed operations by composing operations, forming a list of operations or modifying an operation by use of a transformer.
A named operation is either a predefined operation or an operation that
has been given an explicit name using the IS
definition mechanism.
operation composition
- Class:
concept - See Also:
curried operation
A sequence of simple-operation denotations forms an operation-sequence in the syntax of Nial. Its meaning is the same as the composition of the operations in the sequence which is explained by its effect when applied.
The result of applying an operation-sequence to an argument is determined by applying the simple-operations in the sequence in right-to-left order. The simple-operation on the right is applied to the argument giving an intermediate result. Then the simple-operation to the immediate left is applied to the result of the first application. Subsequent simple-operations are applied to the results in turn.
An example of this concept is the expression
(first rest) 8 7 2 5 3
7
The expression sequence first rest
is evaluated by applying rest
to
the argument resulting in 7 2 5 3 and then first
is applied giving 7.
The relationship can be described by the equations:
(f g) A = f (g A)
(f g h) A = f (g (h A))
etc.
which is mathematically known as the rule of function composition .
operation form
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
operation, definition
An operation-form is the syntactic structure used to describe an operation in terms of a parameterized expression-sequence. The identifiers following the keyword operation are called the formal parameters . The body of an operation-form is normally a block but it may be an expression-sequence without automatic localization.
operation-form ::=
OPERATION { identifiers }+ block
| OPERATION { identifiers }+
( expression-sequence )
An operation-form defines a local environment. The formal parameter
names are names of local variables. If the body of the operation form is
a block, the local environment of the block is extended to include the
formal parameters. When the operation is applied, the formal parameter
names are assigned from the value of the actual argument. If there is
only one formal parameter, the actual argument is assigned to it as a
whole; otherwise, the items of the actual argument are assigned to the
formal parameters in corresponding order. If there is a length mismatch
between the list of formal parameter names and the values of the actual
argument, the fault ?op_parameter
is returned.
The value of the application of the operation is the value of the body
of the operation-form, which is evaluated with the local variables in
the parameter list assigned as described above. In determining the
association for a name that appears in the body of an operation form,
Q’Nial looks for the name in the local environment. If the name is not
found locally, the name is sought in surrounding environments until it
is found or until the global environment is searched. If it is not
found, a fault ?unknown identifier:
is given when the operation-form
is analyzed (parsed).
Operation-forms are most frequently used in definitions where they are given an associated name. However, an operation-form can appear directly in an expression provided it is enclosed in parentheses. In this usage, it can be an argument to a transformer name or can be applied to an array argument.
opposite
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
opposite A
opp A
- See Also:
minus, not, reciprocal
The operation opposite
returns the opposite value of the integer or
real number A
. The opposite value of a positive number A is the
corresponding negative value and vice versa. The operation produces the
following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | opposite of the corresponding integer |
integer | opposite integer |
real | opposite real number |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
The name opp
is a synonym for opposite
used as an abbreviation.
opposite l -2 3.5 `a "abc ??err
-1 2 -3.5 ?A ?A ?err
In Nial, the symbol -
is used as part of negative numbers and as a
synonym for minus
. Care must be taken to use a space after the symbol
before a constant to get the expected subtraction.
Definition
opposite IS OPERATION A (0 minus A)
Equations
opposite opposite opposite A = opposite A
A - B = A + opposite B
ops
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Ops
- See Also:
symbols, exprs, trs, vars
The expression Ops
returns a list of phrases giving the names of all
user defined operations in the workspace.
Definition
Ops IS {
Names Roles := pack symbols 0;
"op match Roles sublist Names }
or
- Class:
logic operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
or A
A or B
- See Also:
and, not
The operation or
applies to a boolean array A
and does the boolean
sum of its items. If any item of A
is true
, the result is true
;
otherwise it is false
. Used in binary form, it implements the usual
or-connective of logic. If A
is a simple array but has a non-boolean
item, the result is the logical fault ?L
. The operation extends to
non-simple arrays by the multi pervasive mechanism.
l or o
l
or oooolooo
l
lloo or lolo
lllo
Or
is a reductive operation in that it reduces an array of booleans to
a single boolean. Applied to a pair of bitstrings, it produces a
bitstring resulting from applying or to the bits of its arguments in
corresponding positions.
Equations
A or B = B or A
not or A =f= and EACH not A
outer
- Class:
applicative transformer - Usage:
A OUTER f B
OUTER f A
- See Also:
cart, inner
The transformer OUTER
transforms an operation f
to an operation that
applies f
to each item of the cartesian product of its argument. In
the case where the arguments are a pair of lists A
and B
, the result
is a table of the applications of f
with every pair chosen with the
first item from A
and the second from B
.
1 2 3 4 5 OUTER * 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
2 4 6 8 10
3 6 9 12 15
4 8 12 16 20
5 10 15 20 25
2 3 OUTER reshape 'abcd'
+---+---+---+---+
|aa |bb |cc |dd |
+---+---+---+---+
|aaa|bbb|ccc|ddd|
+---+---+---+---+
The first example shows OUTER *
being used to generate a
multiplication table. The second shows that it can be applied to an
operation that has a non-atomic result.
Definition
OUTER IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A (EACH f cart A)
Equations
shape OUTER f A = link EACH shape A
and EACH (not empty) A B ==> A OUTER f B = mix (A EACHLEFT EACHRIGHT f B)
overflow
- Class:
concept
The term integer overflow is used to describe the situation when an integer that is too big for the internal representation of integers is generated. Q’Nial uses 32 bit integers and checks for overflow during computations. If an arithmetic computation produces an overflow, a fault value is produced.
An overflow can also develop during computation with real numbers. The computer hardware detects such a problem and an interrupt occurs which causes Q’Nial to jump to top level.
pack
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Usage:
pack A
- See Also:
eachall, eachboth
The operation pack
interchanges the top two levels of an array with
equally shaped items. If A
is an array with items all of the same
shape, the result is an array of that shape, with items having the shape
that A
has. If A
does not have items of the same shape but all the
items that have zero items or more than one item are of the same shape,
it is modified by replicating the items with one item to that shape
before interchanging levels. Otherwise it returns the fault ?conform
.
The items of the result are the arrays of items of A
from
corresponding positions. Pack
is used implicitly in all binary
pervasive and multi pervasive operations.
pack (2 3 4) (4 5 6)
+---+---+---+
|2 4|3 5|4 6|
+---+---+---+
pack 'ab' 'cd' 'ef' 'gh'
+----+----+
|aceg|bdfh|
+----+----+
pack (tell 2 3) (count 2 3)
+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||0 0|1 1|||0 1|1 2|||0 2|1 3||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
||1 0|2 1|||1 1|2 2|||1 2|2 3||
|+---+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+|
+---------+---------+---------+
pack (2 3 4) 5 [2 3] 'abc'
+-----------+-----------+-----------+
|+-+-+---+-+|+-+-+---+-+|+-+-+---+-+|
||2|5|2 3|a|||3|5|2 3|b|||4|5|2 3|c||
|+-+-+---+-+|+-+-+---+-+|+-+-+---+-+|
+-----------+-----------+-----------+
The first example shows that pack
of a pair of triples is a triple of
pairs. The second shows that pack
of a quadruple of pairs is a pair of
quadruples. The third shows that pack
of a pair of 2 by 3 tables is a
2 by 3 table of pairs. The final example shows a case where replication
occurs. The first and last items have shape [3]. The second and third
items are an atom and a solitary and hence can be replicated.
Equations
equal EACH shape A and not empty pack A ==> pack pack A = A
pack pack pack A = pack A
pack single A = EACH single A
pack solitary A = EACH solitary A
empty A ==> pack A = single A
simple A ==> pack A = single A
pair
- Class:
construction operation - Usage:
A pair B
pair A B
- See Also:
link, hitch, append, reshape
The operation pair
has no effect on a pair but converts all other
arrays to a pair by reshaping the array with shape 2. Used in infix
notation, it has the effect of forming a pair from the two arguments. An
explicit pair can also be achieved with list or strand notation. The
operation is useful in functional expressions where it is an argument to
a transformer.
3 pair 4 5
+-+---+
|3|4 5|
+-+---+
pair 3 4 5
3 4
pair single 3 4 5
+-----+-----+
|3 4 5|3 4 5|
+-----+-----+
The major use of pair
is as an operation applied using a transformer.
Definition
pair IS OPERATION A (2 reshape A)
Equations
pair pair A = pair A
A OUTER pair B = A cart B
parse
The operation parse
carries out the internal parsing capability of the
interpreter. Its argument is a token stream produced by scan
or
deparse
. The result is the parse tree recording the semantic intent of
the input. The parse tree is a highly encoded form of nested array
designed for efficient processing.
parse scan 'sum 23 45'
+---+-----------------------------+
|100|+-+-----+-------------------+|
| ||4|3 4 3|+-+-------+-------+||
| || | ||8|1 23 23|1 45 45|||
| || | |+-+-------+-------+||
| |+-+-----+-------------------+|
+---+-----------------------------+
parse scan 'foo IS first'
+---+-----------------------------+
|100|+--+---------------+------+-+|
| ||11|+--+----------+|3 47 3|1||
| || ||22|2 160 7459|| | ||
| || |+--+----------+| | ||
| |+--+---------------+------+-+|
+---+-----------------------------+
The first example gives the parse tree corresponding to an application
of an operation to a strand of constants. The second example gives the
parse tree for the definition of foo
as the predefined operation
first
. The small integers that appear as the first items of the arrays
serve as tags to indicate the kind of node that is represented in the
parse tree. They are used by the eval
and deparse
operations. The
representation of parse trees is implementation dependent and is not
intended for program manipulation.
Equations
Ts a token stream ==> parse deparse parse Ts = parse Ts
S a string ==> eval parse scan S = execute S
partition
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
I,J] PARTITION f A
I] PARTITION f A
- See Also:
rank, split, blend
The transformer PARTITION
is used to apply operation f
to partitions
of the array A
, placing the results of the applications as partitions
of the result array.
The partitions of A
are determined by the axis numbers in I
, using (
I split A
) to form them implicitly. The results of applying f
,
viewed as an intermediate array R
, are combined into the final result,
using ( J blend R
), to place the axes of the items of R
into the
final result. If the left argument is a solitary, it is assumed to be
used as the argument to both split
and blend
implicitly.
For a table A
, I = 1, f being reverse
, the effect is to reverse the
rows of A
. In general, if I = J
and is a single axis number and f
maps a list to one of the same length, the effect is to apply f
to the
lists formed by pushing axis I
down, resulting in an array of the same
shape as A
. Two dimensional partitions of a three dimensional array
can be mapped using an I
with tally 2.
[1] PARTITION reverse (3 5 reshape count 15)
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11
[0] PARTITION (2 rotate) (6 6 reshape tell 36)
12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35
0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
setformat '%4.2f';
seed .5 ; A:=2 3 3 reshape random 18
0.50 0.43 0.12 0.03 0.81 0.24
0.77 0.73 0.89 0.58 0.98 0.47
0.98 0.66 0.16 0.24 0.16 0.50
B gets 1 2 split A
+--------------+--------------+
|0.50 0.43 0.12|0.03 0.81 0.24|
|0.77 0.73 0.89|0.58 0.98 0.47|
|0.98 0.66 0.16|0.24 0.16 0.50|
+--------------+--------------+
C gets EACH inverse B
+-----------------+-----------------+
|-7.43 0.18 4.69|-2.51 2.21 -0.90|
|11.78 -0.62 -5.55| 1.09 0.25 -0.76|
|-3.27 1.48 0.51| 0.83 -1.13 2.69|
+-----------------+-----------------+
1 2 blend C
-7.43 0.18 4.69 -2.51 2.21 -0.90
11.78 -0.62 -5.55 1.09 0.25 -0.76
-3.27 1.48 0.51 0.83 -1.13 2.69
[1 2] PARTITION inverse A
-7.43 0.18 4.69 -2.51 2.21 -0.90
11.78 -0.62 -5.55 1.09 0.25 -0.76
-3.27 1.48 0.51 0.83 -1.13 2.69
The transformer RANK
is a simpler version of a partitioning
transformer that always pushes down the right end axes.
Definition
PARTITION IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION Ij A {
IF empty Ij or (tally Ij > 2) THEN
fault 'invalid left arg of PARTITION transform'
ELSEIF empty A THEN
A
ELSE
IF tally Ij = 1 THEN
I := J := first Ij;
ELSEIF tally Ij = 2 THEN
I J := Ij;
ENDIF;
II gets axes A except I link I;
B := tally I RANK f (II fuse A);
IF J = Null and (shape B = Null) THEN
first B
ELSEIF tally J = (valence B - (valence A - tally I)) THEN
JJ gets axes B except J link J;
GRADE <= JJ fuse B
ELSE
fault 'left arg incompatible with function in PARTITION transform'
ENDIF
ENDIF }
Equations
I split A = \[I,Null] PARTITION single A
I blend A = \[Null,I] PARTITION first A
EACH f A = \[Null,Null] PARTITION (single f first) A
pass
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
pass A
- See Also:
list, reshape
The operation pass
is the identity operation for arrays. It returns
the argument A
. Pass
is used when expressing computations in a
functional style using an atlas (a list of operations).
pass 2 3 4
2 3 4
pass 'hello world'
hello world
Definition
pass IS OPERATION A { A }
Equations
pass A = first single A
pass A = first solitary A
paste
- Class:
picture operation - Usage:
Sw paste A
- See Also:
picture, sketch, diagram, positions
The operation paste
combines character tables in a two dimensional
layout. It is used internally by picture
and can be used to create
modifications of the standard picture output to improve the display of
results. The left argument Sw
has six parameters that control the
layout and the right argument A
is the array of tables to be combined.
The components of argument Sw
are the
following:
Argument | |
---|---|
Vertical edge spacing | an integer indicating the number of blank lines to be put between the rows of items |
Horizontal edge spacing | an integer indicating the number of blank spaces to be put between the columns of items |
Vertical line indicator | If the value is 1, vertical lines are drawn between columns. If it is 0, they are not |
Horizontal line indicator | If the value is 1, horizontal lines are drawn between rows. If it is 0, they are not |
Vertical justification indicator | This is either a single integer indicating the same justification for all fields or an array of integers of the same shape as A indicating the justification for each item of A. The codes are: 0 for top justification, 1 for centered and 2 for bottom justification |
Horizontal justification indicator | This is either a single integer indicating the same justification for all fields, or an array of integers of the same shape as A indicating the justification for each item of A. The codes are: 0 for left justification, 1 for centered and 2 for right justification |
If either line indicator is 1, the entire result is boxed.
1 2 1 3 1 1 paste EACH sketch (2 4 reshape 'some' 'words' 'of' 'wisdom')
+--------+---------+------+----------+
| | | | |
| some | words | of | wisdom |
| | | | |
+--------+---------+------+----------+
| | | | |
| some | words | of | wisdom |
| | | | |
+--------+---------+------+----------+
pervasive
- Class:
concept - See Also:
unary pervasive, binary pervasive, multi pervasive
Some of the operations of Nial that operate on simple arrays are extended to arbitrarily nested arrays by being applied to the atoms at the deepest level. These are called pervasive operations.
There are three classes of pervasive operations: unary pervasive
,
binary pervasive and multi pervasive
. The first class applies the
operations to the atoms of the array. The second class are binary
operations that apply to pairs of atoms from corresponding positions in
the pair of arguments. The third class applies the operation to the
simple arrays formed from atoms in corresponding positions in the items
of the argument, reducing the simple array to a single atom.
phrase
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
phrase S
- See Also:
string, fault, tonumber, isphrase
The operation phrase
converts a string into a phrase with the same
content. It returns phrases and faults unchanged and converts other
atoms after coercing them to their string equivalents. The resulting
phrase may contain blanks. There is a one-to-one correspondence between
phrases and strings.
phrase '(613) 549-2222'
(613) 549-2222
set "decor ; EACH phrase o 613 3.5 `A 'Now' "Wow ?error
"o "613 "3.5 "A "Now "Wow "error
Equations
isphrase P ==> phrase string P = P
Pragmatics
The correspondence between phrases and strings is not complete in that
phrase cannot hold a null character (representation 0) and attempting to
build such a phrase using the operation phrase
will result in a
truncated phrase.
pi
- Class:
constant expression - Usage:
Pi
- See Also:
random, ln
The expression Pi
returns the real number which is the ratio of the
circumference of a circle to its diameter. Pi
is useful in scientific
computing.
setformat '%15.12f' ; Pi
3.141592653590
Equation
Pi = arccos -1 (within roundoff error)
pick
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
I pick A
pick I A
- See Also:
choose, take, first, address
Pick
is the fundamental selection operation for arrays. The normal use
is that I
is an address for A
. The result is the item that is
located at address I
in 0-origin addressing. If I
is a solitary
integer and A
is a list, I
is converted to an integer to make it an
address for a list. If I
is not a valid address for A
, the result is
the fault ?address
.
3 pick 3 6 23 46 57 25
46
[3] pick 3 6 23 46 57 25
46
A := 2 3 reshape "a "list "of "words "as "phrases
a list of
words as phrases
0 2 pick A
of
5 5 pick A
?address
In the first example, pick
selects the fourth item because of 0-origin
indexing. In the second example, [3] is not an address of the list
(its addresses are integers) but it is converted to integer 3. Thus, a
solitary integer can be used as an address of a list for pick
. The
third example shows that an address for a table is a pair of integers.
The last example shows that picking out of range returns a fault.
The concept of picking closely corresponds to subscript notation in
mathematics. Q’Nial supports a direct notation for subscripting a
variable: Var@I
. This notation, called the at notation
, can be used
on both the left and right of an assignment expression. Its use on the
right is equivalent to pick
.
Equations
I pick A = (list I) pick A
I in grid A ==> I pick grid A = I
I in grid A ==> I pick (EACH f A) = f (I pick A)
A choose B = A EACHLEFT pick B
I pick A = \[I] reach A
picture
The operation picture
computes a character table that describes the
array A
.
An atom is displayed directly. A nonatomic array is displayed as a tableau of rows and columns arranged to allow sufficient space for the largest items. In most cases, the items of the array are displayed within a frame diagram.
The operation is affected by the setting of two internal switches:
diagram/sketch
and decor/nodecor
. The first controls the use of
frames in the pictures. The second controls the decoration of atoms,
solitaries, strings and empty arrays.
In diagram
mode, a nonatomic array is displayed with a frame and the
upper left corner has an o
if it is a single. In sketch mode, a simple
array, one having atomic items, is displayed without a frame. A
non-simple array has a frame and a nonatomic single has an o
in the
upper left corner of the frame.
The decor/nodecor
switch pictures atoms in an undecorated manner if
nodecor mode is set. If sketch mode is also set, strings and phrases
appear the same. The decor mode pictures atoms so that they can be
distinguished: characters are preceded by a grave symbol `
,
phrases by a double quote "
and faults by a question mark ?
. In
sketch mode with decor set, a string is enclosed in quotes and a simple
solitary is placed in brackets.
In sketch mode an empty array has an empty picture, whereas in diagram mode, the picture of an empty array is one side of a frame diagram, with no items.
An array of dimensionality higher than two is laid out as an arrangement of tables. If the array has valence 3, the tables are arranged horizontally. If it has valence 4, the first axis is placed down the page and the second axis across the page. Thus, an array of shape 3 4 5 6 is pictured as 3 rows of 4 tables each of which is a 5 by 6 tableau. A space is left between each of the tables. For higher dimensions, the axes continue to alternate across and down the page with greater spacing between arrangements.
The result of picture
coincides with the output displayed by Q’Nial in
the top level loop.
In the top level loop, the picture is wrapped around as a whole if it is too wide to fit on the screen.
set "sketch; set "nodecor;
P := picture l 1 7 7.0 `a "a 'a' (3 4 5) Null
+-+-+-+--+-+-+-+-----++
|l|1|7|7.|a|a|a|3 4 5||
+-+-+-+--+-+-+-+-----++
set "diagram; set "nodecor; P
+-+-+-+--+-+-+---+-------+-+
|l|1|7|7.|a|a|+-+|+-+-+-+|+|
| | | | | | ||a|||3|4|5||||
| | | | | | |+-+|+-+-+-+|+|
+-+-+-+--+-+-+---+-------+-+
set "sketch; set "decor; P
+-+-+-+--+--+--+---+-----++
|l|1|7|7.|`a|"a|'a'|3 4 5||
+-+-+-+--+--+--+---+-----++
set "diagram; set "decor; P
+-+-+-+--+--+--+----+-------+-+
|l|1|7|7.|`a|"a|+--+|+-+-+-+|+|
| | | | | | ||`a|||3|4|5||||
| | | | | | |+--+|+-+-+-+|+|
+-+-+-+--+--+--+----+-------+-+
set "diagram; set "decor;
picture 3 4 5
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
|`+|`-|`+|`-|`+|`-|`+|
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
|`||`3|`||`4|`||`5|`||
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
|`+|`-|`+|`-|`+|`-|`+|
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
The first four examples illustrate the same array pictured with the four
combinations of the mode settings. The final example illustrates that if
the result of picture
is displayed at top level in diagram - decor
mode, the implicit use of picture
on the resulting character table
causes it to be decorated.
Equations
write A = writescreen picture A
valence picture A = 2
place
- Class:
insertion operation - Usage:
B I place A
place (B I) A
- See Also:
pick, placeall, deepplace, update
The operation place
is the fundamental insertion operation for arrays.
The normal use is that I
is the address where B
is to be placed in a
modified version of A
. The result is the modified array. If I
is a
solitary integer and A
is a list, I
is converted to an integer
before being used. If I
is not a valid address for A
, the result is
the fault ?address
.
"abc 2 place 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 abc 5 6
place (`_ 2) 'my work'
my_work
A := 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7
A := 27 2 place A; A
4 5 27 7
50 100 place A
?address
The fourth example shows the use of place
in updating the value of a
variable A
. The last example illustrates an out of range use of
place
.
Nial provides a simpler notation for updating a variable. A@I
(pronounced A at I
) can be used on the left of assignment to update
the item at location I
. If the address is out of range a fault occurs.
A@1 := 25
4 25 27 7
A@5 := 7
?address
A
4 25 27 7
The semantics of using the at notation
on the left in assignment can
be achieved using the operation update
. The at notation
and the
update
operation are usually more efficient than place
because they
avoid doing a copy of the right argument of place
.
Equations
I in grid A ==> (I pick A) I place A = A
B \[I] deepplace A = B I place A
I in grid A ==>shape(B I place A) = shape A
placeall
- Class:
insertion operation - Usage:
B I placeall A
placeall (B I) A
- See Also:
place, deepplace, updateall
The operation placeall
generalizes the operation place
to modify a
collection of items of A
. It returns a modified version of array A
with the items at the addresses I
replaced by the items of B
. It
corresponds to the sequential use of place
with corresponding items
from B
and I
. If an item of I
is repeated, its last occurrence
will determine the effect on A
. If B
has fewer items than I
, its
items are used cyclically (the first item is used after the last and the
list repeated).
("abc "def) (2 3) placeall 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 abc def 6
Text := 'my work is fun';
placeall ('_' (` findall Text)) Text
my_work_is_fun
A := 4 5 6 7 ;
A := (27 28) (3 2) placeall A; A
4 5 28 27
The last example shows the use of placeall
to update the value of a
variable A
.
Q’Nial provides a simpler notation for updating a variable at several
locations. The notation A#I
(pronounced A at all I
) can be used on
the left of assignment to indicate the update of the items at the
addresses given by I
. If an item of I
is out of range, the result is
a fault but the variable is modified by the assignments done to
locations that precede the invalid one.
A#(0 1) := 25 26
25 26 27 7
A#(2 100) := 50 51
?addresses
A
25 26 50 7
The semantics of using the at all
notation on the left in assignment
can be achieved using the operation updateall.
The at all
notation and the updateall
operation are usually more
efficient than placeall
as they avoid doing a copy of the entire right
argument of placeall
.
Placeall
is not the same as (pack B I) EACHBOTH place A
. The latter
results in an array of modifications of A
, one for each item to be
replaced.
Equations
I allin grid A ==> (I choose A) I placeall A = A
I allin grid A ==> shape (B I placeall A) = shape A
plus
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A plus B
plus A B
- See Also:
sum, minus, mod, opposite, times
The operation plus
is the same as sum
except that plus
enforces
the rule that it must be applied to a pair.
Sum
is multi pervasive and can add up any number of items. The symbol
7 plus 9
16
(2 3 4) plus (12 22 33)
14 25 37
plus 2 3 4
?plus expects a pair
positions
The operation positions
is used in conjunction with picture
on
singles, lists or tables. For such arrays, it returns an array of the
same shape with the items being the addresses at which the pictures of
the corresponding items of A
appear in the picture of A
.
A gets 2 3 reshape "cat 'fish' 34.5 "dog 'meat' 26.5
+---+----+----+
|cat|fish|34.5|
+---+----+----+
|dog|meat|26.5|
+---+----+----+
positions A
+---+---+----+
|1 1|1 5|1 10|
+---+---+----+
|3 1|3 5|3 10|
+---+---+----+
The operation positions
is useful in applications that do interactive
editing of data from its display on the screen.
post
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
post A
- See Also:
reshape, list, pass, cols
The operation post
restructures an array A
to be a table with one
column holding the items of A
in row major order.
post 3 4 5
3
4
5
post 'Now is the time'
'for all good men'
'to come to the aid'
'of the party'
+------------------+
|Now is the time |
+------------------+
|for all good men |
+------------------+
|to come to the aid|
+------------------+
|of the party |
+------------------+
The major purpose of post is to restructure data for display.
Definition
post IS OPERATION A { (tally A) 1 reshape A}
Equations
shape post A = (tally A) 1
post post A = post A
power
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A power B
power A B
- See Also:
binary pervasive, sqrt, divide, ln, exp
The operation power
returns the result of raising the number A
to
the power B
. The result is an integer if both A
and B
are boolean
or integer and B
is non-negative. If B
is an integer, the power is
done by multiplication. Otherwise it uses exp (B * ln A)
.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER power R
1 1 1. ?A ?A ?error
2 4 5.65685 ?A ?A ?error
2.5 6.25 9.88212 ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
2 power 3
8
2 power -3
0.125
16 power .5
4.
The examples show that power
has different meanings depending on the
right argument B
. If B
is a positive integer, the result is A
multiplied by itself B
times. If B
is a negative integer, the result
is the reciprocal of the result when B
is positive. The last case
illustrates that if B
is 0.5, the result is a real number that is a
square root of
Equations
isreal B ==> A power B = exp (B * ln A)
sqrt A = A power 0.5 (within roundoff error)
predicate
- Class:
operation property
A predicate is an operation that tests a condition and returns true if the condition holds and false otherwise. A predicate is not pervasive.
The predefined predicate operations include:
Operation | Test |
---|---|
allin | set-like inclusion |
atomic | an array is an atom |
diverse | all items differ |
empty | an array has no items |
equal | all items are equal |
isboolean | arg is a boolean atom |
ischar | arg is a character atom |
isfault | arg is a fault symbol |
isinteger | arg is a integer number |
isphrase | arg is a symbol |
isreal | arg is a real number |
isstring | arg is a list of characters |
like | two arrays contain same items |
simple | all items are atoms |
unequal | items are not all equal |
up | lexical ordering |
prefix notation
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
infix notation
An operation-expression can precede an array-expression. This is called a prefix use of the operation expression.
+ 7 5
12
reshape [2 3,1 2 3 4 5 6]
1 2 3
4 5 6
prelattice of atoms
The ordering sequence of the characters for sorting purposes is fixed for each Q’Nial version.
The binary and multi pervasive comparative operations of Nial organize
the atoms of Nial in a prelattice or sorting sequence. The operation
lte
(or <=
) does a less than or equal comparison between atoms. The
numeric atoms are comparable, with a coercion being done if the
arguments are of different numeric type. The nadir
, represented by the
fault ?O
, is less than or equal to all atoms. The zenith
, ?I , is
greater than or equal to all atoms. Except for these two special cases,
literal atoms are incomparable with atoms of different type. However,
they can be compared within the same type using a character collating
sequence that is version specific.
Phrases are compared lexicographically, such that "apple
is after
"ape
but before "apt
. Strings, being character lists, produce a list
of results when compared.
Comparisons are of two forms: binary pervasive predicates which return
boolean values and multi pervasive predicates that obtain the largest or
smallest item in a list. If two atoms are incomparable, the predicates
return false
, whereas max
returns the zenith
and min
returns the
nadir
.
These rules were chosen so that the following laws hold for all arrays
A
and B
:
max A <= B = and (A EACHLEFT <= B)
A <= min B = and (A EACHRIGHT <= B)
See the entry for up
for a discussion of the lexicographic ordering in
Q’Nial.
product
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
product A
* A
A product B
A * B
- See Also:
times, divide, sum, plus, minus
The operation product
multiplies the items of a simple array of
numbers, reducing them to a single number that is their product. The
type of the result is the highest type of the items. The operation is
extended to non-simple arrays by the multi pervasive mechanism. The
symbol *
and prod
are synonyms for product
. The operation times
is product
restricted to use on pairs.
For an empty array, the result is 1.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error
l 2 2.5 a abc ?error
R OUTER product R
1 2 2.5 ?A ?A ?error
2 4 5. ?A ?A ?error
2.5 5. 6.25 ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
product 3. 45. 23. 18. 3.5
195615.
product (3 4 5)(2 3 2)(0 2 4)(1 1 1)
0 24 40
The first example shows the result of product
on all combinations of
types of atoms. The last example shows that pervasive extension of
product
multiples a list of triples in an item by item fashion.
Equations
A product B = B product B
product single A = EACH(product single) A
product EACH product A =f= product link A
shape cart A = product EACH tally A
product shape A = tally A
profile
- Class:
profiling operation - Usage:
profile Fnm
- See Also:
setprofile, clearprofile, profiletable, profiletree, profiling
The operation profile
is used to convert the profiling statistics into
a displayable form. If Fnm
is a file name, as a string or a phrase,
then the output is written to the file. If it is the empty string, then
the profiling information is displayed on the screen. If logging is on,
it will be copied to the log file. The gathering of profile statistics
must be turned off when profile
is called.
A detailed example of the output is given in the help entry on profiling.
Examples of use:
profile "myprofl
profile ''
profiletable
- Class:
profiling expression - Usage:
Profiletable
- See Also:
profile, setprofile, clearprofile, profiling
The expression Profiletable
is used to summarize the internal data
structures that are used in the gathering of profiling statistics to
produce the same information that is displayed by the operation
profile
. It produces a list of entries, one for each definition that
has been encountered during execution with profiling on. Each entry
includes the name, the number of direct calls, the number of recursive
calls, the execution time, and a list of subentries for the definitions
directly called by the definition. The subentries summarize the
information for the called definitions in the same format except that no
further breakdown is given on definitions they call.
A detailed example of the output of Profiletable
is given in the help
entry on profiling.
Profiletable
+-----------------+-------------------------------------+---
|+----+--+-+----++|+-----+--+-+----+-------------------+|+--
||test|12|0|4.12||||tryit|11|0|4.12|+-----------------+|||ag
|+----+--+-+----++|| | | | ||+----+--+-+----++||||
| || | | | |||test|11|0|4.12||||||
| || | | | ||+----+--+-+----++||||
| || | | | |+-----------------+|||
| |+-----+--+-+----+-------------------+|+--
+-----------------+-------------------------------------+---
----------------------------------+
---+-+-+----+--------------------+|
ain|1|0|3.96|+------------------+||
| | | ||+-----+--+-+----++|||
| | | |||tryit|10|0|3.96|||||
| | | ||+-----+--+-+----++|||
| | | |+------------------+||
---+-+-+----+--------------------+|
----------------------------------+
profiletree
- Class:
profiling expression - Usage:
Profiletree
- See Also:
profile, setprofile, clearprofile, profiletable, profiling
The expression Profiletree
is used to display the detailed information
from the internal data structures that are used in the gathering of
profiling statistics. It produces a nested list of entries showing the
calling dynamic calling sequence from top level, with the amount of time
and number of calls at each level. Each entry includes the name, the
number of direct calls, the execution time, and a list of subentries for
the definitions directly called by the definition. The subentries
provide the same information for the called definitions in the same
format including entries on all the definitions that they call in turn.
A detailed example of the output of Profiletable
is given in the help
entry on profiling.
Example of use:
Profiletree
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
|TOPLEVEL|0|4.18|+------------+-----------------------------
| | | ||+----+-+--++|+-----+-+----+---------------
| | | |||test|1|0.||||tryit|1|0.16|+--------------
| | | ||+----+-+--++|| | | ||+----+-+----++
| | | || || | | |||test|1|0.16||
| | | || || | | ||+----+-+----++
| | | || || | | |+--------------
| | | || |+-----+-+----+---------------
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | |+------------+-----------------------------
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------+
--+--------------------------------------------------+|
-+|+-----+-+----+-----------------------------------+||
+|||again|1|3.96|+---------------------------------+|||
|||| | | ||+-----+--+----+-----------------+||||
|||| | | |||tryit|10|3.96|+---------------+|||||
|||| | | ||| | | ||+----+--+----++||||||
+||| | | ||| | | |||test|10|3.96||||||||
-+|| | | ||| | | ||+----+--+----++||||||
|| | | ||| | | |+---------------+|||||
|| | | ||+-----+--+----+-----------------+||||
|| | | |+---------------------------------+|||
|+-----+-+----+-----------------------------------+||
--+--------------------------------------------------+|
------------------------------------------------------+
profiling
- Class:
concept - See Also:
setprofile, profile
Q’Nial Profiling Facility
Q’Nial has a profiling capability that is used to gather relative execution times for operations, transformers and defined expressions written in Nial. The profiling capability has the following features:
Command | Purpose |
---|---|
setprofile A | turns on or off the internal routines that collect the statistics |
profile Fnm | that displays the profile data to the screen or writes it to a file |
Clearprofile | clears the current profile information and reinitializes the profiling system |
Profiletable | provides the profile information as a table |
Profiletree | provides the detailed profile information in terms of the call tree |
The operation setprofile
is called with argument l
to turn on the
collection of data for a profiling session. It is called with argument
o
to suspend gathering statistics for a session. Both calls to
setprofile
should be in the same scope, and cannot be nested. Only one
profiling session can be underway at a time.
The operation profile
is called with a text argument (string or
phrase) that is used as the file name for the profile information. If an
empty string is the argument, the output is sent directly to the screen.
It computes the statistics on the profiling session underway, prepares
the output, and writes it to the file.
The expression Clearprofile
clears the two internal data structures
that are built as execution is profiled so that a new profiling session
can be started.
The expression Profiletree
provides the summary data that is displayed
in the output produced by profile
, but stores it in a Nial array.
The expression Profiletree
provides a dynamic call tree of the
execution with related times. This provides a more detailed breakdown of
the profile data. The following session illustrates the use of the
profiling capability:
setwidth 60;
test is op n {
z := random n n;
max abs (z - inv inv z) }
tryit is op N { test N }
again is op M N { sum EACH tryit (M reshape N) }
fact is op n {
IF n<=1 THEN 1 ELSE n * fact (n - 1) ENDIF }
# first profiling session
setprofile l
o
test 20
3.86843e-15
tryit 50
2.83107e-14
again 10 75
6.72483e-13
setprofile o
l
profile ''
Total execution time of profile session: 4.780000
Total execution time in top level calls: 4.420000
op name[.tr arg] calls[rec] time time/call % time
test.......................... 12 4.42 0.3683 100.0<
tryit......................... 11 4.31 0.3918 97.5<
test......................... 11 4.31 0.3918 100.00
again......................... 1 4.04 4.0400 91.4<
tryit........................ 10 4.04 0.4040 100.00
profiletree
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
|TOPLEVEL|0|4.78|+--------------+---------------------------
| | | ||+----+-+----++|+-----+-+----+-------------
| | | |||test|1|0.11||||tryit|1|0.27|+------------
| | | ||+----+-+----++|| | | ||+----+-+----
| | | || || | | |||test|1|0.27
| | | || || | | ||+----+-+----
| | | || || | | |+------------
| | | || |+-----+-+----+-------------
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | || |
| | | |+--------------+---------------------------
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------+
----+--------------------------------------------------+|
---+|+-----+-+----+-----------------------------------+||
--+|||again|1|4.04|+---------------------------------+|||
++|||| | | ||+-----+--+----+-----------------+||||
|||||| | | |||tryit|10|4.04|+---------------+|||||
++|||| | | ||| | | ||+----+--+----++||||||
--+||| | | ||| | | |||test|10|4.04||||||||
---+|| | | ||| | | ||+----+--+----++||||||
|| | | ||| | | |+---------------+|||||
|| | | ||+-----+--+----+-----------------+||||
|| | | |+---------------------------------+|||
|+-----+-+----+-----------------------------------+||
----+--------------------------------------------------+|
--------------------------------------------------------+
# second profiling session
clearprofile
setprofile l
o
test 30
1.72085e-14
fact 4
24
setprofile o
l
profile ''
Total execution time of profile session: 0.330000
Total execution time in top level calls: 0.050000
op name[.tr arg] calls[rec] time time/call % time
test.......................... 1 0.01 0.0100 20.0<
fact.......................... 1[ 3] 0.04 0.0400 80.0<
profiletree
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
|TOPLEVEL|0|0.33|+--------------+---------------------------
| | | ||+----+-+----++|+----+-+----+--------------
| | | |||test|1|0.01||||fact|1|0.04|+-------------
| | | ||+----+-+----++|| | | ||+----+-+--+--
| | | || || | | |||fact|1|0.|+-
| | | || || | | ||| | | ||+
| | | || || | | ||| | | |||
| | | || || | | ||| | | |||
| | | || || | | ||| | | |||
| | | || || | | ||| | | |||
| | | || || | | ||| | | |||
| | | || || | | ||| | | ||+
| | | || || | | ||| | | |+-
| | | || || | | ||+----+-+--+--
| | | || || | | |+-------------
| | | || |+----+-+----+--------------
| | | |+--------------+---------------------------
+--------+-+----+-------------------------------------------
------------------------------+
-----------------------------+|
----------------------------+||
---------------------------+|||
--------------------------+||||
-------------------------+|||||
----+-+--+--------------+||||||
fact|1|0.|+------------+|||||||
| | ||+----+-+--++||||||||
| | |||fact|1|0.||||||||||
| | ||+----+-+--++||||||||
| | |+------------+|||||||
----+-+--+--------------+||||||
-------------------------+|||||
--------------------------+||||
---------------------------+|||
----------------------------+||
-----------------------------+|
------------------------------+
% end of session
The profile statistics show the division of time between the various definitions. For each definition called during the profiling session there is a summary of the number of calls and time used. For each definition there is also a breakdown on the time spent in other definitions that were directly called from that definition.
Entries in the profile statistics that have a “<” to the right of the last value are top level calls. All other entries have been called by these top level calls.
The time spent in direct recursive calls is counted in the original call. The number of such calls is placed in brackets after the number of top level calls.
The statistics do not account for local definitions within global ones; their execution time is simply added to the time for the global definition.
A feature of the profiler not shown in the above example is that when timing a transformer definition, the time spent executing the argument operation(s) is computed in order to understand how much of the cost of the transformer is due to applying the argument operation(s).
The accuracy of the timing information is limited by the precision of the information available through system calls to the host system. For very small definitions the statistics may show no execution time. Usually their effect can be estimated by considering the execution time of the calling definition.
The Profiletable
result provides the summarized profile statistics as
a quintuple consisting of the name of the definition, the number of
calls, the number of recursive calls, the time, and a list of records
for each definition it directly calls. Each of the latter records has
the same information provided for the routine itself, but does not
report on the definitions it itself calls.
The Profiletree
result starts with a node indicating the toplevel and
the total execution time. It has a list of subnodes for each definition
called from the top level. Each of these has the number of calls, the
execution time and nodes for each definition it calls. A recursive call
is reported directly in a subnode and hence a deeply recursive routine
will produce a deeply nested array of profile information.
program fragment
- Class:
concept - See Also:
expression
Nial is a programming language specifically designed for use in an interactive environment. The formal description of the language describes the valid language constructs that can be entered in one interaction; and explains the meaning of one such entry in terms of the environment created by earlier interactions in the same session. The term program fragment is used to describe a meaningful piece of program text.
The rules for writing well formed program fragments in Nial are called
the syntax rules
of Nial. A program fragment that is well formed is
said to be syntactically correct. The syntax rules are analogous to the
rules of grammar that determine the correctness of English.
putfile
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
putfile Filename A
- See Also:
getfile, appendfile
The operation putfile
writes the rows of items of A
as text records
to the file with name Filename
. It is used in conjunction with
getfile
. The file must not be open. Items of A
are arrays of
characters of any valence.
In the following example, three strings would be written to the file Maillist.
putfile "Maillist ['Now is the time' 'for all good
men','to come to the aid']
Definition
putfile IS OPERATION File A {
IF not isfault (Filenum := open File "w) THEN
ITERATE (Filenum writefile) (link EACH rows A) ;
close Filenum ;
ELSE
Filenum
ENDIF }
quiet_fault
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
quiet_fault A
- See Also:
fault
The operation quiet_fault
is a version of operation fault
that turns
off fault triggering before producing the fault and restores the
triggering switch to its prior value after producing the fault.
Definition
quiet_fault IS OPERATION Str {
Oldsetting := settrigger o;
Res := fault Str;
settrigger Oldsetting;
Res }
quotient
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A quotient B
quotient A B
- See Also:
mod, floor, divide
The operation quotient
returns the quotient of dividing integer A
by
integer B
. If the divisor B
is zero, the result is zero. If it is
negative, the result is the fault ?negative divisor
. The operation
quotient
converts boolean arguments to integer but otherwise produces
a fault if either argument is not an integer.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error;
R OUTER quotient R
1 0 ?A ?A ?A ?error
2 1 ?A ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
(5 quotient 2) (-5 quotient 2)
2 -3
(5 quotient -2) (5 quotient 0)
?negative divisor 0
The first example illustrates all combinations of atom types for the two
arguments to quotient
.
The quotient on division by a positive integer B
is always an integer
on the same side of the origin as A
. The result of A quotient 0
is 0
rather than a fault since this rule is compatible with the choice that
A mod 0
is A
.
The operation quotient
is used in place of divide
in situations
where the result must be an integer.
Equation
isinteger A ==> A quotient 0 = 0
floor (A - (B*(A quotient B))) =f= A mod B
A quotient B =f= floor (A / B)
raise
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
N raise A
raise N A
- See Also:
split, rows, cols, mix, rank
The operation raise
is used to partition an array A
along its axes
by indicating that the first N
axes are to be retained in the result.
The remaining axes become axes of the items of the result. N
must be
an integer in the range from 0 to valence A
. The result is an array of
shape given by taking the first N
items of shape A
. The items of the
result have the shape given by dropping the first N
items of shape
A
. Thus, the 2 raise
of an array of shape 3 4 2 is a 3 by 4 table of
pairs. The 1 raise
of the same array is a triple of 4 by 2 tables.
A := 3 4 2 reshape 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX'
AB IJ QR
CD KL ST
EF MN UV
GH OP WX
2 raise A
+--+--+--+--+
|AB|CD|EF|GH|
+--+--+--+--+
|IJ|KL|MN|OP|
+--+--+--+--+
|QR|ST|UV|WX|
+--+--+--+--+
1 raise A
+--+--+--+
|AB|IJ|QR|
|CD|KL|ST|
|EF|MN|UV|
|GH|OP|WX|
+--+--+--+
Definition
raise IS OPERATION A { N drop axes A split A }
Equations
N a nonnegative integer <= valence A and not empty A ==> shape (N raise A) = N take shape A
shape first (N raise A) = N drop shape A ==> mix (N raise A) = A
random
- Class:
array generation operation - Usage:
random S
- See Also:
seed
The operation random
is used to generate pseudo-random real numbers in
the range from 0. to 1. The argument S
is a shape and random
generates product S
numbers storing them in an array of shape S
.
Random
uses a congruential method with period 2147483647. The random
generator generates a sequence of integers using the formula: R
:= 16807 * R mod 214783647
starting with R = 314159262. The result is
the real R/2147483647. The sequence can be initialized using the
operation seed
with an argument N
, where 0. < N < 1.0
.
Seed
resets the random number generator to use `R = floor (R1
- 214783647.)`.
seed 0.314159; random 5
0.070 0.743 0.240 0.627 0.309
floor ( 100. * random 2 5 )
98 19 94 47 36
88 44 47 82 38
The first example shows the five random numbers generated after a seed
of 0.314159 is used. The second example illustrates how to use the
operation random
to generate 10 random integers between 0 and 99 and
store them in an array of shape 2 5.
rank
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
N RANK f A
- See Also:
byrows, bycols, partition, raise
The transformer RANK
applies an operation f
to arrays formed from
the last N
axes of A
. The results of the applications of f
must
all be the same shape and are combined to form a result array using
mix
.
2 RANK reverse (3 4 5 reshape count 60)
20 19 18 17 16 40 39 38 37 36 60 59 58 57 56
15 14 13 12 11 35 34 33 32 31 55 54 53 52 51
10 9 8 7 6 30 29 28 27 26 50 49 48 47 46
5 4 3 2 1 25 24 23 22 21 45 44 43 42 41
1 RANK sum (3 4 reshape count 12)
10 26 42
The first example reverses the planes of the generated array. The second example sums the rows of the generated matrix.
Definition
RANK IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION N A {
mix EACH f (N lower A) }
reach
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
P reach A
reach P A
- See Also:
pick, choose, deepplace
The operation reach
is used to select an array at an arbitrary path
P
within the nested structure of A
. P
is a list of addresses where
the first item of P
selects an item of A
, the second selects an item
of that item, etc. If P
is empty, the result is A
. The operation is
implemented as an iterated pick
and hence the addresses in the path
are converted using first if they are solitary integers. If one of the
picks attempts a selection out of bounds, the result is fault ?path
.
A := 3 4 reshape (pack 'ABCDEFGHIJKL' '1234567890ab')
+--+--+--+--+
|A1|B2|C3|D4|
+--+--+--+--+
|E5|F6|G7|H8|
+--+--+--+--+
|I9|J0|Ka|Lb|
+--+--+--+--+
(2 0) 1 reach A
9
In the example, the path (2 0) 1 picks the item with address 1 of the location with address 2 0.
Q’Nial supports a direct notation for doing a reach
into an array
associated with a variable: Var@@I
(pronounced Var at path I
). The
at path
notation can be used on both the left and right of an
assignment expression.
Definition
reach IS P A {
IF empty P THEN
A
ELSE
rest P reach (first P pick A)
ENDIF }
Equations
P reach A = (EACH list P) reach A
items of P are valid addresses where used ==> (P reach A) P deepplace A = A
read
- Class:
interactive input/output operation - Usage:
read P
- See Also:
readscreen, write, writescreen, execute
The operation read
is used in an interaction with the user running a
program to obtain an array value from the keyboard after issuing a
prompt given by the string or character P
. After receiving the prompt,
the user types a sequence of characters and then presses the Return
key. The sequence of characters, excluding the Return
, becomes the
string entered. The string is executed to give the result of read
. If
the string being executed contains an integer representation that would
convert to a number outside the range of integers, the corresponding
real number is returned.
A := read 'Type an expression : ';
Type an expression : 3 + count 10
A
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
The operation read
is similar to operation readscreen
. The
difference is that in read
the string received from the keyboard is
evaluated, whereas in readscreen
, the string is returned.
Definition
read IS OPERATION P { execute readscreen P }
readarray
- Class:
nial direct access file operation - Usage:
readarray Fnum N
- See Also:
readrecord, writearray, filetally, eraserecord, open, close
The operation readarray
is used to read the component or components
indicated by N
from the direct access file with file port Fnum
. The
file must have been created using writearray
and must have been opened
as a direct file using open
.
If N
is an integer, the result is the array stored at record position
N
of the file.
If N
is a list of integers, the result is a list of the corresponding
records. If there is no record at position N
, the result is the fault
?missing
. If N
is greater than filetally A
, the result is the
fault ?eof
.
readarray Fnum [23,24,25];
If N
is a solitary integer, the result is a solitary holding the
selected item.
readfield
- Class:
host direct access file operation - Usage:
readfield Filename Start Size
- See Also:
writefield, filelength, readrecord, readarray
The operation readfield
is used to read a portion of an existing host
file as a character string. The string or phrase Filename
is the name
of the file, the integer Start
is the offset to the beginning of the
field to be read and integer Size
is the size of the field to be read.
The result is character string of the items read. If the logical field
extends across a line boundary the field will include the newline
indicator appropriate for the host system (either linefeed or
return-linefeed).
Example
readfield "Myfile 80 20
The result is the string beginning at offset 80 in file Myfile
of
length 20.
readfile
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
readfile Fnum
readfile Fnum N
- See Also:
writefile, getfile, open, close, readscreen
The operation readfile
is used to read the next record from the
sequential text file designated by file port Fnum
. The file port
Fnum
is the integer returned by open
, which must have been called
before executing the readfile
.
A record of text in a text file is a sequence of characters up to but excluding an end-of-line indication. The end-of-line indication is system dependent and may be one or more characters. The interface between Q’Nial and the host system recognizes end-of-line and, on successive readfile requests, returns the records of the text file with the end-of-line indications removed.
If readfile
is used with a second argument N
, it reads the next N
bytes of the text file and returns them as a string. In this usage,
end-of-line characters are processed as any other character and are not
removed. This second form is intended for reading information from
device drivers or a communications port, where end-of-line indications
may not be given.
The following example shows a text file, Myfile being opened and its
records being gathered as a list of strings. The example has the same
effect as the expression getfile "Myfile
.
File_number := open "Myfile "r ;
Records := '' ;
Record := readfile File_number ;
WHILE Record ~= ??eof DO
Records gets Records append Record ;
Record := readfile File_number ;
ENDWHILE ;
close File_number ;
readrecord
- Class:
nial direct access file operation - Usage:
readrecord Fnum N
- See Also:
readarray, writerecord, filetally, eraserecord, open, close
The operation readrecord
is used to read the component or components
indicated by N
from the direct access file with file port Fnum
. If
N
is an integer, the result is the string stored at component position
N
of the file. The file must have been opened as a direct file and
must have been created using writerecord
.
If N
is a list of integers, the result is a list of the corresponding
records. If there is no component at N
, the result is the fault
?missing
. If N
is greater than filetally A
, the result is the
fault ?eof
.
A direct access file is stored as two host system files: a .ndx
file
holding index information and a .rec
file holding the records.
readrecord Fnum [23,24,25];
convert_records IS OP Filein Fileout {
Fin := open Filein "d ;
Fout := open Fileout "d ;
Num := filetally Fin ;
writerecord Fout (tell Num)
(EACH convert_op (readrecord Fin (tell Num)));
EACH close Fin Fout ; }
The first example shows a call of readrecord
that returns three
records. The second example shows an operation convert_records
that
reads all the records in direct file Filein
, modifies them by
convert_op
and writes them to direct file Fileout
. For a very large
file, it may be necessary to replace the use of EACH
with a loop.
The readrecord
operation can access fields of a fixed format file
created external to Q’Nial. If the component number used in a
readrecord
is beyond the end of file as indicated by the filetally
Fnum
, stored in the .ndx
file, the .rec
file is checked to see if
the host file information indicates that the .rec
file extends beyond
the length expected for a file created by the Q’Nial operations. If so,
the .rec
file is assumed to consist of a sequence of blocks of
records, with each block having fields of the sizes indicated by the
.ndx
file. The index information for the record at (N mod filetally
Fnum)
is used to find the requested component within the block of
records found from (N quotient filetally Fnum)
.
To use this feature, a separate process must be followed to create the
.ndx
file corresponding to one block of records in the external file.
This is done by writing a sequence of strings of the lengths of the
records to a dummy direct access file and then renaming the resulting
index file and the external file to be names expected by the Q’Nial
direct access facility.
readscreen
- Class:
interactive input/output operation - Usage:
readscreen P
- See Also:
read,readfile, writescreen
The operation readscreen
is used to obtain a string from the keyboard
after issuing the prompt P
. The prompt P
must be a character or a
string. After receiving the prompt, the user types a sequence of
characters and then presses the Return
key. The sequence of
characters, excluding the Return
, is the string returned as the result
of readscreen
.
Name := readscreen 'Your name? : ' ;
Your name? : Mike
Name
Mike
Answer := first 'Do you wish to continue? y/n: ' ;
IF Answer in 'yY' THEN ...
The operation readscreen
is similar to the operation read
, the
difference being that in read
, the string received from the keyboard
is evaluated, whereas with readscreen
, the string is returned.
reciprocal
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
reciprocal A
recip A
- See Also:
divide, quotient, opposite
The operation reciprocal
or recip
for short, returns a real number
which is the reciprocal value of a numeric atom.
Reciprocal
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the
six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | reciprocal of the corresponding real |
integer | reciprocal of the corresponding real |
real | 1.0 / A if A ~= 0.; ?div if A = 0. |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
reciprocal l -2 3.5 `a "abc ??error
1. -0.5 0.285714 ?A ?A ?error
reciprocal -2 (3 -4.5)
+----+------------------+
|-0.5|0.333333 -0.222222|
+----+------------------+
Definition
reciprocal IS OPERATION A (1 divide A)
Equations
A divide B = A * reciprocal B
reciprocal reciprocal reciprocal A = reciprocal A (within roundoff error)
recur
- Class:
recursion transformer - Usage:
RECUR [test, endf, parta, joinf, partb] A
- See Also:
across, down
RECUR is a general recursion transformer with five operation arguments:
test
checks that the argument meets an end condition, endf
is
applied to the end argument before starting to build the result, parta
computes the left value from the argument, which is stacked, joinf
combines the left and right values as the recursion unwinds, and partb
gives the value to be recurred on to produce the right value.The
recursion terminates provided the repeated application of the operation
partb
results in an array that satisfies test
.
RECUR [ 0 =, 1 first, pass, product, -1 +] 4
24
RECUR [ empty, 0 first, first, plus, rest ] 3 4 5
12
Definition
RECUR is TR test endf parta joinf partb OP A {
Elements := Null;
WHILE not test A DO
Elements := Elements append parta A;
A := partb A;
ENDWHILE;
Res := endf A;
FOR E WITH reverse Elements DO
Res := E joinf Res;
ENDFOR;
Res }
Equations
RECUR [test, endf, parta, joinf, partb] A
= FORK [test, endf, joinf [parta, RECUR [test, endf, parta, joinf, partb] partb]] A
RECUR [ 0 =, 1 first, pass, product, -1 +] N = factorial N
RECUR [ empty, 0 first, first, plus, rest ] A = sum A
reduce
- Class:
reduction transformer - Usage:
REDUCE f A
- See Also:
accumulate, reductive
The transformer REDUCE
transforms an operation f
into an operation
which, when applied to an array A
, has the same effect as evaluating
an expression in which f
is placed between the items of the array,
with grouping done in a right-to-left manner. If f
is an operation
that maps a pair of atoms to an atom, REDUCE f
reduces a simple array
to an atom. For the built-in reductive operations: sum
, product, and,
or, max, min , and link
, REDUCE f is the same as f
.
REDUCE divide 3 4 5 6
.625
3 divide (4 divide ( 5 divide 6 ) )
.625
REDUCE plus (count 10)
55
REDUCE hitch 'abcde'
abcde
REDUCE append 'abcde'
+-+----------+
|a|+-+------+|
| ||b|+-+--+||
| || ||c|de|||
| || |+-+--+||
| |+-+------+|
+-+----------+
REDUCE pass 73 45 39 97
+--+----------+
|73|+--+-----+|
| ||45|39 97||
| |+--+-----+|
+--+----------+
Definition
REDUCE IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
% if f is reductive, apply f directly;
IF empty A THEN
Res := ??identity;
ELSE
Res := last A;
FOR B WITH reverse front A DO
Res := B f Res;
ENDFOR;
ENDIF;
Res }
Equations
REDUCE f solitary A = A
REDUCE f single A = A
REDUCE f A B C = A f (B f C)
reducecols
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
REDUCECOLS f A
- See Also:
reduce, reducerows, bycols
The transformer REDUCECOLS
does the reduction of the columns of A
with the operation f
.
REDUCECOLS sum (5 6 reshape count 30)
65 70 75 80 85 90
The example returns the sum of the columns of the generated table.
Definition
REDUCECOLS IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
[valence A - 2 max 0,axes first A] PARTITION REDUCE f A }
reducerows
- Class:
apply-by-partition transformer - Usage:
REDUCEROWS f A
- See Also:
reduce, reducecols, byrows
The transformer REDUCEROWS
does the reduction of the rows of A
with
the operation f
.
REDUCEROWS product (3 4 reshape count 12)
24 1680 11880
The example returns the product of the rows of the generated table.
Definition
REDUCEROWS IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
BYROWS (REDUCE f) A }
reductive
- Class:
operation property - See Also:
multi pervasive, reduce
A reductive operation is one that extends a functional capability normally defined on a pair to a list, reducing the result by pairwise application of the function.
The predefined reductive operations include:
Operation | Function |
---|---|
and | logical “and” of a boolean array |
link | the list of all the items of the items in the array |
max | highest item in the array |
min | lowest item in the array |
or | logical “or” of a boolean array |
product | arithmetic product of an array of numbers |
sum | arithmetic sum of an array of numbers |
All of the above operations except link
are also multi pervasive.
The transformer REDUCE
can be used to produce a reductive operation
from a binary one.
repeat-loop
- Class:
control structure - Usage:
REPEAT expression_sequence UNTIL conditional_expression ENDREPEAT
- See Also:
while-loop, for-loop
The REPEAT-loop
notation is used when executing an expression sequence
repeatedly until a conditional expression returns true
.
F := open Filenm "r;
Lines := '';
Done := o;
REPEAT
Line := readfile F;
IF isfault Line THEN
Done := l;
ELSE
Lines := Lines append Line;
ENDIF;
UNTIL Done ENDREPEAT;
reserved words
- Class:
syntax
A reserved word or keyword is one that has a special usage in a
Nial construct and must be used only for that purpose. A block
delimits a local environment. It allows new uses of names which do not
interfere with uses of those names outside the block. For example,
within a block, a predefined operation name can be redefined and used
for a different purpose. Only the reserved words of Q’Nial cannot be
reused in this fashion.
An identifier, which is spelled the same, ignoring case, as any of the reserved words given below cannot be used to name a variable or a definition. In a local environment, an identifier can be chosen that is the same as a predefined or user-defined global definition name. Such a choice makes the global use of the name unavailable in the local context.
A reserved word is displayed in upper case in canonical form.
Reserved Word | Construct |
---|---|
BEGIN | Synonym for { in block |
CASE | case-expression |
DO | for-expression, while-expression |
ELSE | if-expression, case-expression |
ELSEIF | if-expression |
END | case-expression, synonym for } in block |
ENDCASE | case_expression |
ENDFOR | for-expression |
ENDIF | if-expression |
ENDREPEAT | repeat-expression |
ENDWHILE | while-expression |
EXIT | exit-expression |
EXPRESSION | declaration |
EXTERNAL | declaration |
FOR | for-expression |
FROM | case-expression |
GETS | assign-expression |
IF | if-expression |
IS | definition |
LOCAL | declaration |
NONLOCAL | declaration |
OP | synonym for operation |
OPERATION | operation-form, declaration |
REPEAT | repeat-expression |
THEN | if-expression |
TR | synonym for transformer |
TRANSFORMER | transformer-form, declaration |
UNTIL | repeat-expression |
VARIABLE | declaration |
WHILE | while-expression |
WITH | for-expression |
reshape
- Class:
reshaping operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A reshape B
reshape A B
- See Also:
post, shape, tally
The operation reshape
is the major mechanism in Nial for creating
multivalent arrays. The operation requires A
to be a shape, either
Null
or a list of integers. If A
is an integer, it is converted to
the solitary holding the integer. If A
is not a shape, the result is
the fault ?shape
.
The result of reshape
is an array of shape A
with items chosen from
the list of items of B
. If the number of items to be used to fill the
result is less than the tally of B
, the remaining items of B
are
ignored. If the number is more than the tally of B
, the items of B
are used cyclically. If B
has no items, fault ?fill
is used as the
items of the result.
2 3 reshape 4 6 (4 5) 3 "abc
+-+---+---+
|4| 6|4 5|
+-+---+---+
|3|abc| 4|
+-+---+---+
2 3 reshape 'abcdefghij'
abc
def
5 reshape solitary 3 4
+---+---+---+---+---+
|3 4|3 4|3 4|3 4|3 4|
+---+---+---+---+---+
The last example illustrates that to replicate an arbitrary array, in
this case the pair 3 4, reshape
is applied to the solitary holding the
array.
Equations
shape A reshape A = A
shape A reshape list A = A
shape A reshape (first A hitch rest A) =f= A
A a shape implies ==> shape (A reshape B) = A
A reshape list B = A reshape B
A is a shape ==> EACH f (A reshape B) = A reshape EACH f B
tally A reshape A = list A
(tally A) 1 reshape A = post A
single A = Null reshape solitary A
solitary A = [ 1 ] reshape single A
Null = [ 0 ] reshape A
rest
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
rest A
- See Also:
first, front, drop, sublist
The operation rest
returns the list of A
after dropping the first
item of the list. If the argument of rest
is not a list, it is treated
as a list.
rest 3 4 5 6
4 5 6
rest tell 2 3
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 1|0 2|1 0|1 1|1 2|
+---+---+---+---+---+
rest 7 = Null
l
The last example shows that the rest of an atom is the empty list
Null
.
Definition
rest IS OPERATION A (1 drop list A)
Equations
rest A = rest list A
not empty A ==> first A hitch rest A = list A
tally rest A = 0 max (tally A - 1)
first rest A = second A
rest Null = Null
resume
- Class:
debugging command - Usage:
resume
- See Also:
break, step, next, toend, debugging, setdeftrace
When break debug mode
is initiated by means of the Break
expression
or the operation breakin
(or by using <Ctrl b>
while awaiting input
in window mode on a console version), a break loop is initiated with
output like:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Break debug loop: enter debug commands, expressions or
type: resume to exit debug loop
<Return> executes the indicated debug command
current call stack :
foo
-------------------------------------------------------------
?.. C := A + ( + A + A )
-->[stepv]
In the above example the break loop awaits input with the default
command stepv
assumed. If resume
is typed then the break loop is
exited and control returns to the expression following the break point.
Break
--------------------------------------------------------------
Break debug loop: enter debug commands, expressions or
type: resume to exit debug loop
<Return> executes the indicated debug command
current call stack :
-------------------------------------------------------------
?.. C := A + ( + A + A )
-->[stepv] resume
reverse
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Usage:
reverse A
- See Also:
transpose, rotate, list
The operation reverse
returns an array of the same shape as A
having
the items in reverse order.
reverse 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4
reverse 'able was I ere I saw Melba'
ableM was I ere I saw elba
EACH reverse 'This' 'seems' 'too' 'wonderful'
+----+-----+---+---------+
|sihT|smees|oot|lufrednow|
+----+-----+---+---------+
reverse count 3 4
+---+---+---+---+
|3 4|3 3|3 2|3 1|
+---+---+---+---+
|2 4|2 3|2 2|2 1|
+---+---+---+---+
|1 4|1 3|1 2|1 1|
+---+---+---+---+
reverse (10 take) reverse sketch 1.23
1.23
The fourth example illustrates that the reverse of a 3 by 4 table is a 3
by 4 table with the list of items reversed. The last example shows the
use of take
and reverse
to right-justify text in a field.
Definition
reverse IS OPERATION A {
shape A reshape (tally A - count tally A choose A) }
Equations
shape reverse A = shape A
reverse reverse A = A
reverse A = shape A reshape reverse list A
front A = reverse rest reverse A
last A = first reverse A
role
- Class:
concept - See Also:
global environment
The term role is used to describe the class of object associated with an identifier in Nial. The possible roles are: reserved word, variable, expression, operation or transformer. An identifier that corresponds to a reserved word can play no other role in a workspace. An identifier that corresponds to a predefined object in Nial cannot be changed in the global environment, but can take on a different object association in a local environment. In the global environment, once the role of an identifier is established, it must keep the same role, but may have its association changed to another object of the same role.
An external-declaration assigns a role to a name in the global environment so that the name can be used in other definitions before it is completely specified. This mechanism is useful for creating mutually recursive definitions. An external declaration is made only in the global environment.
If the name is already defined with the same role, the declaration has no effect. If the name has another role, a fault is reported.
If the expression on the right of IS
in a definition uses the name
being defined, the definition is assumed to be recursive. The name is
assigned a role compatible with its use on the right if it does not
already have a role.
If a definition appears within a block, the association between the name of the identifier and its meaning is made in the local environment. Otherwise, the association is made in the global environment and the definition assigns a role to the name as representing that kind of expression.
If the name being associated in a definition is already in use, the new definition must be for a construct of the same role and the earlier definition is replaced. The use of a defined name always refers to its most recent definition.
rotate
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A rotate B
rotate A B
- See Also:
reverse, transpose, list
The operation rotate
shifts the items of array B
to the left A
places, inserting the items that drop off the front of the list on the
back. If A
is a negative number, the shift is to the right.
2 rotate 24 35 46 57 12 24 39
46 57 12 24 39 24 35
-5 rotate tell 3 5
+---+---+---+---+---+
|2 0|2 1|2 2|2 3|2 4|
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|0 4|
+---+---+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|1 3|1 4|
+---+---+---+---+---+
The second example shows that on a table rotate
works on the list of
items in row major order.
Definition
rotate IS OPERATION N A {
Newlist := tally A + N + grid A mod tally A choose list A;
shape A reshape Newlist }
Equations
N an integer ==> shape (N rotate A) = shape A
N rotate A = shape A reshape (N rotate list A)
N rotate A = N mod tally A rotate A
N rotate A = opposite(tally A-N) rotate A
rows
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
rows A
- See Also:
cols, split, mix, rank
The operation rows
is normally used on a table A
. In this case, it
returns a list of lists, with each item being a list of items from one
row of the table. For a multidimensional array, the result is an array
of lists of length equal to the length of the last axis of A
. The
valence of the result is one less than the valence of A
.
A := 2 3 reshape "Bill "Tom "Mary "Jack "Dawn "Alice
Bill Tom Mary
Jack Dawn Alice
rows A
+-------------+---------------+
|Bill Tom Mary|Jack Dawn Alice|
+-------------+---------------+
A := 2 2 2 3 reshape count 32
1 2 3 7 8 9
4 5 6 10 11 12
13 14 15 19 20 21
16 17 18 22 23 24
rows A
+-----+--------+ +--------+--------+
|1 2 3|4 5 6 | |13 14 15|16 17 18|
+-----+--------+ +--------+--------+
|7 8 9|10 11 12| |19 20 21|22 23 24|
+-----+--------+ +--------+--------+
Definition
rows IS OPERATION A ( valence A - 1 max 0 raise A)
Equations
shape rows A = front shape A not empty A ==> shape first rows A = last shape A
not empty A ==> mix rows A = A
T a variable associated with a table ==> I pick rows T = T|[I,]
save
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
save Wsname
- See Also:
load
The operation save
is used to save a workspace with the name given by
the phrase or string Wsname
. The convention in Q’Nial is to name
workspaces with the extension .nws
so that they are easy to find in
the directory. When saving or loading a workspace, the extension may be
omitted.
The effect of saving a workspace is to place the contents of the current
workspace in the named file in an internal format. The contents of the
current workspace are unchanged by doing a save
.
save "mywork
A save
operation may be executed within an operation or expression.
The effect is to interrupt the execution and do the save at the top
level.
If the saved workspace contains an expression with the name Latent
,
whenever the workspace is loaded, the load
operation will execute the
Latent
expression. This can be used to have a workspace automatically
begin an application, or to set up desired default values for various
switch settings.
scan
The operation scan
translates Nial program text to internal form. This
process is called tokenizing as it results in a list containing tokens.
The argument S
is a string. The result is a list beginning with 99 and
followed by an alternating sequence of integer codes and phrases.
scan 'A := 3 * 5.2'
99 2 A 1 := 16 3 2 * 18 5.2
scan 'sum 2 (35 + 42.7)'
99 2 SUM 16 2 1 ( 16 35 2 + 18 42.7 1 )
scan 'foo IS first rest'
99 2 FOO 1 IS 2 FIRST 2 REST
The first example has 5 tokens, the second has 7 and the third has 4. In a token stream, the token for an identifier is in upper case.
The scan
token codes are given below:
Code | Meaning |
---|---|
1 | reserved word or delimiter |
2 | identifier |
14 | string |
15 | phrase |
16 | integer |
18 | real number |
22 | fault |
42 | atomic character |
40 | atomic boolean or bitstring |
Equations
S a string ==> execute S = eval parse scan S
S a string ==> scan descan scan A = scan A
scope of a variable
- Class:
concept - See Also:
local environment, role
The use of an assign-expression indicates that a name (identifier) is to be treated as a variable in the context surrounding the assign-expression. This context is called the scope of the variable. The context may be global, in which case the variable may be visible at all levels; or it may be local to some region of program text. A local scope is created for the parameters of operation forms and for variables created within a block.
Because operation forms or blocks may appear within other operation forms or blocks, it is possible to have one scope for a name nested within another. A name is said to be visible at a point in a program text if it has a local meaning at that point or has a meaning in some surrounding scope or is a global name. When a name is used in a local scope, it is the local association in the innermost scope that is used, instead of an association with the same name in a surrounding scope.
A block is a scope-creating mechanism that permits an expression-sequence to be created so that it has local definitions and variables which are visible only inside the block. A block may appear as a primary-expression or as the body of an operation-form.
Definitions that appear within the block have local scope. That is, the definitions can be referenced only in the body of the block. Variables assigned within the block may or may not have local scope, depending on the appearance of a local and/or a nonlocal declaration. If there is no declaration, all assigned variables have local scope. Declaring some variables as local does not change the effect on undeclared variables that are used on the left of assignment. They are automatically localized.
If a nonlocal declaration is used, an assigned name that is on the nonlocal list is sought in surrounding scopes. If the name is not found, a variable is created in the global environment.
second
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
second A
- See Also:
first, third, pick, take
The operation second
returns the second of the items of A
. If A
has only one item or it is empty, it returns the fault ?address
.
second 4 5 6
5
second tell 3 4
0 1
second Null
?address
Definition
second IS OPERATION A (1 pick list A)
Equations
second list B = second B
second B = first rest B
see
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
see Defname
- See Also:
descan, deparse, getdef
The operation see
displays the definition of the user defined object
named by the phrase or string Defname
. The canonical form of the
definition appears directly on the screen. The operation cannot be used
on predefined names. The display is in sketch/nodecor
mode regardless
of the current settings.
foo IS first rest;
see "foo
foo IS first rest
It is possible to capture the display given by see
using the
composition of operations descan deparse getdef Defname
, which returns
the list of lines of the display. This technique is used in the
operation defedit
.
Definition
see IS OPERATION A {
Settings gets EACH set "sketch "decor;
ITERATE writescreen descan deparse getdef A;
EACH set Settings; }
seed
- Class:
array generation operation - Usage:
seed Num
- See Also:
random, floor
The operation seed
sets the initial number for the random number
generator used by random
. The argument Num
is a positive decimal
fraction less than 1. Seed
is used to get predictable results from a
program that uses random
. Seed
returns the value that would have
been used to generate the next random number.
seed .25374;
floor (100. * random 3)
60 73 83
seek
- Class:
search operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A seek B
seek A B
- See Also:
in, find
The operation seek
returns a pair of values. The first is a boolean
indicating whether or not A
is an item of B
. The second is the
address of the first occurrence of A
as an item of B
, searching B
in row major order. If A
does not occur in B
, the second item of the
result is the gage of the shape of B
. Seek
is the combination of
in
and find
in one operation.
3 seek 56 34 3 23 57 3
l 2
`a seek 'hello world'
o 11
Seek
is useful when determining whether or not A
is in B
and, if
it is, obtaining its position in B
. Both results are obtained in one
internal computation rather than two separate ones.
Definition
seek IS OPERATION A B { A [in,find] B }
Equations
first (A seek B) = A in B
second (A seek B) = A find B
Pragmatics
The operation seek
uses a linear search on the items of B
if the
array has not been sorted, or uses a binary search algorithm if it has.
The latter fact suggests that an array that is searched frequently
should be kept in lexicographical order by applying sortup
to it when
it is created or changed.
seeprimcalls
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
seeprimcalls Mode
- See Also:
break, debugging, breaklist
The operation seeprimcalls
sets an internal flag to the setting of the
boolean argument Mode
. If Mode
is true
, subsequent execution will
monitor the use of all primitive defined expressions, operations and
transformers and will print out a message indicating when the named
primitive has completed execution. If Mode
is false
it turns off the
flag that controls monitoring.
This mode of execution is useful for following the execution flow during debugging.
seeprimcalls True
o
seeusercalls
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
seeusercalls Mode
- See Also:
break, debugging, breaklist
The operation seeusercalls
sets an internal flag to the setting of the
boolean argument Mod
. If Mod
is true
, subsequent execution will
monitor the use of all user defined expressions, operations and
transformers and will print out a message indicating when definitions
are entered and executed. If Mod
is false
it turns off the flag that
controls monitoring.
This mode of execution is useful for following the execution flow during debugging.
seeusercalls True
o
set
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
set Sw
- See Also:
setdeftrace, setformat, setinterrupts, setlogname, setprompt, setwidth
The operation set
changes internal switches in the Q’Nial interpreter.
The switches are used to control the behaviour of a variety of optional
features of Q’Nial. The argument Sw
is a string or phrase in either
case. The result of set is a phrase giving the setting of the switch as
it was prior to the execution of the set operation. The result can be
used subsequently to restore the switch to its original value. The valid
phrases and their purposes are tabulated below:
Setting | Description of Result |
---|---|
diagram | set default display mode to diagram |
sketch | set default display mode to sketch |
decor | turn on decoration of atoms and empty arrays |
nodecor | turn off decoration of atoms and empty arrays |
trace | turn on tracing of expressions at the top level |
notrace | turn off tracing of expressions at the top level |
log | turn on the automatic logging of the session |
nolog | turn off the automatic logging of the session |
set "diagram ;
displayinsketchmode IS OPERATION Result {
A := set "sketch; write picture Result; set A ; }
In the above definition, sketch mode is set at the beginning, saving the
previous setting in the variable A
. When the definition is ended, the
mode is reset to the value in A
.
The default settings are sketch
, nodecor, notrace and nolog
.
setdeftrace
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
setdeftrace Defname Mode
- See Also:
set, step, break
The operation setdeftrace
changes the trace mode for the user defined
expression, operation or transformer definition named by the string or
phrase Defname
. Mode
is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the
trace mode is toggled. If Mode
is present and has the value 1, it
turns trace on. Otherwise it turns trace off. The effect when the trace
mode is on is to trace the execution of the body of the operation
whenever the operation is executed.
The trace mechanism shows intermediate values in the evaluation of expressions.
The operation returns the previous setting. If the result of
setdeftrace
is assigned to a variable, the previous setting can be
restored later.
library "average
setdeftrace "average
0
average 3 4 5
...trace call to operation
...average
...the arguments for the opform are
...A
...A
3 4 5
...A
3 4 5
...sum A
12
...sum A / tally A
4.
...end of operation call
4.
The tracing facility for expressions does not trace all intermediate computations. Parentheses around an expression will force its result to be shown during a trace.
setformat
- Class:
picture operation - Usage:
setformat String
- See Also:
sketch
The operation setformat
controls the format used for picturing real
numbers. String
is a format specification for real numbers using the
conventions for the C library routine printf. There are three styles of
format:
Control | Effect |
---|---|
%f | displays a fixed number of places after the decimal point in a fixed size space with no scaling of the number |
%e | displays the number in scientific notation with an exponent scaling the number to have one digit before the decimal point |
%g | displays the number in f format if possible but defaults to e format if the number is not within a suitable range |
A code can be inserted between the percent sign and the letter. Format
'%15.5f'
uses a field of width 15 to display a number in f
format
with 5 decimal places. The first digit is the width of the field. For
f
format, the second digit gives the number of places after the
decimal while for e
and g
it indicates the number of significant
digits to be displayed. Either digit can be omitted.
Q’Nial requires that the display of a real number includes a decimal
point and that the display of an integer does not include a decimal
point. In a %g
format, printf does not include a decimal point if the
real number matches an integer to the specified precision. In this case,
Q’Nial makes the field one space wider than that specified in order to
accommodate the decimal point. If an f
format is not wide enough to
accommodate the number, it is widened so that the number is displayed.
If the result of an f
format requires more than 40
digits to the
left of the decimal point, it is converted to e
format.
The format '%.17g'
is used by operation display in depicting real
numbers as this format is accurate enough to reproduce the same number
when executed on most systems. The default format is '%g'
. It works as
in C except that a period may be added to distinguish the result from an
integer constant. If the argument to setformat is ''
then it resets
the formatting to the default value.
setformat '%.5f' ;
post exp 10. 80. 90. 100.
22026.46579
55406223843935098300000000000000000.00000
1220403294317840830000000000000000000000.
2.688117141816135610000000000000000000000e+43
X := 2 2 reshape 9777.985 4464784.692 4070333.511 0.079;
setformat '%15.7f' ; [pass,sqrt] X
+-------------------------------+-------------------------------+
| 9777.9850000 4464784.6920000| 98.8836943 2113.0037132|
|4070333.5110000 0.0790000| 2017.5067561 0.2810694|
+-------------------------------+-------------------------------+
setformat '%15.7g' ; [pass,sqrt] X
+---------------------------------+-------------------------------+
| 9777.985 4464785.| 98.88369 2113.004|
| 4070334. 0.079| 2017.507 0.2810694|
+---------------------------------+-------------------------------+
setformat '%15.7e' ; [pass,sqrt] X
+-------------------------------+-------------------------------+
| 9.7779850e+03 4.4647847e+06| 9.8883694e+01 2.1130037e+03|
| 4.0703335e+06 7.9000000e-02| 2.0175068e+03 2.8106939e-01|
+-------------------------------+-------------------------------+
setinterrupts
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
setinterrupts Boolean
The operation setinterrupts
permits or prevents the interruption of
computation by the use of <Ctrl C>
. If the argument is true
,
interrupts are permitted. If it is false
, they are blocked. The
default value is true
.
Setinterrupts
is used in a closed application to prevent the user from
interfering with a computation in process. This may be critical if a
file is being updated in a sequence of steps, which must all be
completed for the data base to remain consistent.
setlogname
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
setlogname Filename
- See Also:
set
The operation setlogname
is used to set the name of the host file in
which a log of the session is recorded. The current log file is closed
and a new one opened. The argument Filename
must be a phrase or a
string.
setlogname "dec17pm
The main purpose of setlogname
is to capture the history of part of a
session in a particular file for later use. The log file can produce
documentation, for example.
setprofile
- Class:
profiling operation - Usage:
setprofile A
- See Also:
profile, clearprofile, profiletable, profiletree, profiling
The operation setprofile
is used to turn on or turn off the gathering
of profiling statistics. The calls must be made at the same scope level
in order for profiling to work correctly. This can either be at the top
level, or within the body of some expression or operation.
The argument is a boolean value: true
starts the profiling process and
false
stops it. Profiling can be turned on and off several times
within one profiling session.
A detailed explanation of the profiling mechanism is given in the help
entry on profiling
.
Example of use:
setprofile True
o
setprompt
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
setprompt S
- See Also:
set
The operation setprompt
sets the Q’Nial prompt to be the string or
phrase S. The default prompt is the string with 5 blank spaces. The
maximum size of a prompt is forty characters. Setprompt
provides the
facility to set a visible prompt which can be distinguished from prompts
issued by other software.
setprompt 'qnial>'
qnial>
settrigger
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
settrigger Switch
- See Also:
quiet_fault, fault, fault triggering
The operation settrigger
sets the action taken when a fault is
generated in an operation. If Switch
is true
, whenever a fault is
generated, computation is interrupted, a message is displayed indicating
the fault that has occurred and the expression where it occurred. Then
the Callstack
is displayed and a loop is entered that allows you to
explore the cause of the fault. If you press Return
at the prompt,
control is sent to the top level loop.
If Switch
is false
, fault triggering is turned off.
The default setting at the start of an interactive session is fault triggering on. The triggering of an interrupt by fault generation is turned off for a direct execution of Q’Nial.
settrigger o
l
setwidth
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
setwidth N
- See Also:
set, writescreen
The operation setwidth
sets the width of the display and log lines.
The argument is an integer N
. The result is the previous setting. The
default setting is 80.
Setwidth
is useful in controlling the format of display on output
saved for documentation purposes. For example, a setting of 130 allows
wide Nial diagrams to be printed on a line printer even though they may
not display properly on the screen. Narrower settings are convenient for
use in reports.
setwidth 50
80
shape
- Class:
measurement operation - Usage:
shape A
- See Also:
tally, valence, reshape
The operation shape
returns an array that describes the rectangular
structure of array A
. Every array has a shape. For a single, including
atoms, the shape is the empty list Null
. For a list, it is a solitary
holding the integer giving the length of the list. For a table or higher
valence array, it is a list of integers giving the extent (number of
items) along each axis.
shape 5 6 7
3
A := 2 3 reshape 4 5 6 7 8 9;
shape A
2 3
B := 2 3 4 5 0 2 reshape 2 ;
shape B
2 3 4 5 0 2
The operation shape
always returns a list whereas tally
returns an
integer. An empty array such as B
is one with a zero in its shape.
Equations
product shape A = tally A
tally shape A = valence A
list shape A = shape A
shape A reshape list A = A
simple
- Class:
structure testing operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
simple A
- See Also:
atomic, twig
The operation simple
tests whether or not an array has all atomic
items or is an empty array. The result is true
if the array is simple
and false
if it is not.
(simple 2 3 4) (simple "abc)
ll
simple Null
l
simple (2 3) (4 5 6)
o
(simple tell 2 3)
o
The first two examples show that a list of integers, an atom and the
empty list Null
are all simple arrays. The next two examples show that
a pair of lists and the result of a tell
are not simple.
Definition
simple IS OPERATION A (EACH single A = A)
Equation
simple A = and EACH atomic A
sin
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
sin A
- See Also:
sinh, cos, pi
The operation sin
implements the sine function of mathematics. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | sine of the corresponding real |
integer | sine of the corresponding real |
real | sine of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?sin |
phrase | fault ?sin |
fault | argument A |
sin l -1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
0.841 -0.841 0.479 ?sin ?sin ?error
Equations
sin opposite A = opposite sin A
(sin A power 2) + (cos A power 2) = 1.0 (within roundoff error)
single
- Class:
construction operation - Usage:
single A
- See Also:
solitary, null, atomic, reshape
The operation single
returns an array with no axes holding A
as its
only item. The result is an array with shape Null
and is said to be a
single .
single 2 3
o---+
|2 3|
+---+
3 = single 3
l
The first example illustrates that a single of a pair contains the pair
as its item. In both diagram
and sketch
modes, the display of a
nonatomic single is decorated with an o
in the upper left corner. The
second example illustrates that the single of an atom is the atom
itself.
Definition
single IS OPERATION A { Null reshape solitary A }
Equations
first single A = A
shape single A = Null
atomic A = single A equal A
EACH f single A = single f A
A EACHLEFT f B = A EACHBOTH f single B
A EACHRIGHT f B = single A EACHBOTH f B
sinh
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
sinh A
- See Also:
cosh, tanh, sin
The operation sinh
implements the hyperbolic sine function of
mathematics. It produces the following results when applied to atoms of
the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | hyperbolic sine of the corresponding real |
integer | hyperbolic sine of the corresponding real |
real | hyperbolic sine of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?sinh |
phrase | fault ?sinh |
fault | argument A |
sinh l -1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
1.1752 -1.1752 0.521095 ?sinh ?sinh ?error
Equation
sinh opposite A = opposite sinh A
sketch
The operation sketch
computes a character table that gives the picture
of the array A
as it is displayed in sketch
mode. The details of the
display of atoms and empty arrays is affected by the setting of the
decor/nodecor
switch.
sketch tell 1 3
The sketch of an array provides an abbreviated display that often serves
as an adequate output format for data. The entry for picture
has a
more complete description of the picturing mechanism.
Definition
sketch IS OPERATION A {
Old_setting := set "sketch;
Result := picture A;
set Old_setting;
Result }
Equation
sketch sketch A = sketch A
solitary
The operation solitary
returns a list of length one holding A
as its
only item. The result is said to be a solitary .
solitary 2 3
+---+
|2 3|
+---+
set "diagram; solitary 3
+-+
|3|
+-+
set "sketch; solitary 3
3
The first example illustrates that a solitary of a pair contains the pair as its item. The second example illustrates that the solitary of an atom is different from the atom itself. However, as the third example shows, in sketch mode, the display of the solitary of an atom is not framed and hence may have the same display as the atom.
Definition
solitary IS OPERATION A { A hitch Null }
Equations
first solitary A = A
solitary A = A hitch Null
solitary A = Null append A
solitary A = list solitary A
solve
- Class:
linear algebra operation - Usage:
A solve B
solve A B
- See Also:
inverse, innerproduct, inner, outer
The operation solve
solves the set of linear equations described by
the equation A x = B
in matrix notation, where A
is an N
by N
matrix and B
is a vector of length N
. Provided that the matrix A
is not singular, the result is the vector of length N
satisfying the
equation (within roundoff error).
In the computation, a numerical estimate is made of the singularity of
A
. If A
cannot be shown to be non-singular with a safe margin, the
result of the operation is the fault ?singular
.
The operation is extended to solve more than one right hand side. If B
is an N
by M
matrix, columns of N
are viewed as right hand sides
and the result is an N
by M
matrix with each column being the
solution of the corresponding column.
seed .314159;
A := ceiling (100. * (3 3 reshape random 9))
8 75 24
63 31 99
20 95 48
B := ceiling (10. * random 3)
4 9 5
X := solve A B
0.787745 0.111836 -0.445402
A innerproduct X
4. 9. 5.
I := 0 1 2 OUTER = 0 1 2 * 1.0
1. 0. 0.
0. 1. 0.
0. 0. 1.
A solve I
0.614865 0.102516 -0.518872
0.0810811 0.00745573 -0.055918
-0.416667 -0.0574713 0.347701
inverse A
0.614865 0.102516 -0.518872
0.0810811 0.00745573 -0.055918
-0.416667 -0.0574713 0.347701
A solve I = inverse A
l
The final example shows that if the right hand side is set to the unit
matrix of size N
, solving it with A
is equivalent to computing the
inverse.
For large examples, it is always faster and more accurate to solve a
system of equations directly using A solve B
than to compute the
inverse and do the inner product operation inverse A innerproduct B
.
The first form does about half as many arithmetic steps.
sort
- Class:
sorting transformer - Usage:
SORT f A
- See Also:
grade, sortup
The transformer SORT
returns the list of items of array A
ordered
according to the comparator f
. The comparator f
is the operation to
be used in comparisons. The operations <=
and >=
are the usual
comparators. If >=
is the comparator in SORT
, the items are returned
in decreasing order. If <=
is the comparator in SORT
, the items are
returned in increasing order.
SORT >= (count 10)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SORT <=("some "words "not "in "order)
in not order some words
Definition
SORT IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A { GRADE f A choose A }
Equations
shape SORT f A = shape A
N an integer ==> SORT <= tell N = tell N
SORT f (SORT f A) = SORT f A
The sort is done internally using either a radix sort (on integers) or a list merge sort algorithm from Knuth’s Vol 3 Searching and Sorting, Algorithm 5.2.5-L, improved according to exercise 12.
sortup
- Class:
sorting operation - Usage:
sortup A
- See Also:
gradeup, sort, up
The operation sortup
returns the list of items of array A
ordered
according to the lexicographical ordering comparator up
.
sortup 3 7 5 4 9 8 2 1 6 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
sortup ("some "words "not "in "order)
in not order some words
Definition
sortup IS SORT up
Equation
gradeup A choose A = sortup A
split
- Class:
nesting restructuring operation - Usage:
I split A
split I A
- See Also:
blend, raise, rows, cols, rank
The operation split
restructures array A
by partitioning the items
of A
into arrays using the given axis numbers in I
to determine the
partition. The axis numbers in I
indicate the axes that are to become
axes of the items. The remaining axes are axes of the result. The
argument I
must be an array of integers in tell valence A
without
duplicates.
A := 2 3 reshape count 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 split A
+-----+-----+
|1 2 3|4 5 6|
+-----+-----+
B := 2 3 4 reshape count 24
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24
2 split B
+-----------+-----------+-----------+
|1 2 3 4 |5 6 7 8 |9 10 11 12 |
+-----------+-----------+-----------+
|13 14 15 16|17 18 19 20|21 22 23 24|
+-----------+-----------+-----------+
1 split B
+--------+--------+--------+--------+
|1 5 9 |2 6 10 |3 7 11 |4 8 12 |
+--------+--------+--------+--------+
|13 17 21|14 18 22|15 19 23|16 20 24|
+--------+--------+--------+--------+
1 2 split B
+----------+-----------+
|1 2 3 4|13 14 15 16|
|5 6 7 8|17 18 19 20|
|9 10 11 12|21 22 23 24|
+----------+-----------+
1 0 split B
+----+-----+-----+-----+
|1 13| 2 14| 3 15| 4 16|
|5 17| 6 18| 7 19| 8 20|
|9 21|10 22|11 23|12 24|
+----+-----+-----+-----+
The first example shows that splitting along the last axis of an array
is equivalent to taking its rows
. The second example shows that the
split
of the middle axis of a trivalent array is a table, with its
shape given by the first and third axes. The last two examples
illustrate two axes being “pushed down”. The result is a list with
tables as items. The order of the axes in the item is determined by the
order of the items in I
.
The operation blend
uses the same control argument to undo the effect
of a split
. A common requirement is to partition an array along its
axes, apply some operation f
to the resulting items and to rebuild the
result into its original form. Partition is used to do this without
computing all the intermediate structures.
Definition
split IS OPERATION I A {
IF empty A THEN
fault '?empty right arg in split'
ELSEIF not(I allin axes A and diverse I) THEN
fault '?invalid left arg in split'
ELSE
J gets axes A except link I;
tally J raise (J link I fuse A)
ENDIF }
Equations
valence A ~= 0 ==> valence A - 1 split A = rows A
diverse I and (I allin tell valence A) ==> shape first (I split A) = list (I choose shape A)
diverse I and (I allin tell valence A) ==> shape (I split A) = shape A except (I choose shape A)
sqrt
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
sqrt A
- See Also:
exp, ln, log, abs, power
The operation sqrt
implements the square root function of mathematics.
It produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six
types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | square root of the corresponding real |
integer | square root of the corresponding real |
real | square root of A |
character | fault ?sqrt |
phrase | fault ?sqrt |
fault | argument A |
Example
sqrt o 1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
0. 1. 0.707107 ?sqrt ?sqrt ?error
sqrt 4.0
2.
Definition
sqrt IS OPERATION A (A power .5)
Equation
sqrt A power 2 = A (within roundoff error)
standard definitions
- Class:
concept - See Also:
clear workspace
Q’Nial has a large set of predefined expressions, operations and
transformers. Most of these are implemented directly in the interpreter.
However, there are a number of them which are defined in Nial codes as
standard definitions in the file defs.ndf
. The definitions are brought
into the initial workspace automatically as part of the initialization
process.
All definitions included in this stage cannot be modified or erased and
the operation see
does not display their text.
status
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Status
- See Also:
filestatus
The expression status
provides seven integers indicating the use of
memory by Q’Nial. In order of display, the items are as follows:
Index | Quantity |
---|---|
0 | Number of free words in the workspace |
1 | Number of words in the largest free block |
2 | Number of free blocks |
3 | Total number of words in workspace |
4 | Stack size in words |
5 | Atom table size in words |
6 | Internal buffer size |
The first entry is an indication of how full the workspace is when compared with the fourth entry. A word can contain an integer, a reference to an array item, or 4 characters. The second entry gives an upper limit to the number of integers that can be in a largest size array. The third item is a measure of the fragmentation of memory. The number of free words divided by the number of free blocks gives the average block size. The fourth item gives the current size of the workspace. It can grow provided the system has space available. The remaining entries give the sizes of internal areas that can grow as necessary.
The starting workspace size can be specified as a parameter to the
nial
command that starts a session in console versions or in a dialog
box in a GUI version. The workspace and the other areas can grow in size
provided there is sufficient space and workspace growth is allowed (the
default).
status
64198 63828 5 100000 4000 6000 1000
step
The command step
is used in debugging a definition that has been
suspended using Break or <Ctrl B>. The effect of step
is to execute
the next expression in an expression sequence and to suspend execution
again. If the current expression involves a call on a defined operation
or expression, execution is suspended on the first expression in its
body. If the current expression is the last one in the expression
sequence where the break began, the effect is the same as using
resume
.
The related command stepv
displays the result of the expression
executed on a step before displaying the next expression.
stepin
The command stepin
is used in debugging a definition that has been
suspended using Break or <Ctrl B>. The effect of stepin
is to
execute the next expression in an expression sequence tracing the
intermediate values generated and to suspend execution again. If the
current expression involves a call on a defined operation or expression,
execution is suspended on the first expression in its body. If the
current expression is the last one in the expression sequence where the
break began, the effect is the same as using resume
.
strand notation
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
bracket-comma notation
A primary-sequence of length two or greater is called a strand . The value of a strand is a list of values. Each item of the list has the value of the primary-expression in the corresponding position in the primary-sequence.
The elements of the primary-sequence can be constants, parenthesized expressions or lists in bracket-comma notation.
8 9 10
8 9 10
8 (3 4 5) 18
+-+-----+--+
|8|3 4 5|18|
+-+-----+--+
8 'abc' "apple
+-+---+-----+
|8|abc|apple|
+-+---+-----+
6 [7,8,9] 10
+-+-----+--+
|6|7 8 9|10|
+-+-----+--+
string
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
string A
- See Also:
phrase, fault, isstring, char, charrep, tolower, toupper
The operation string
is used to convert an atom to a string that
corresponds to the display of the atom. The form of the string is not
sensitive to the setting of the decor/nodecor
display mode, returning
the sketch of the undecorated atom. The string of a string is the string
itself.
set "diagram ; string "abc
+-+-+-+
|a|b|c|
+-+-+-+
string 'abc'
+-+-+-+
|a|b|c|
+-+-+-+
string 2.35
+-+-+-+-+
|2|.|3|5|
+-+-+-+-+
The string of a phrase is the string of the message in the phrase. Thus,
string
is the left inverse of phrase
.
Equations
isstring S ==> string S = S
isstring S ==> string phrase S = S
list string S = string S
string_split
- Class:
string manipulation operation - Usage:
string_split C S [N]
- See Also:
cut, cutall
The operation string_split
is used to break string S
into substrings
using the characters in C
as places to break the string. If two
characters in C
are adjacent in S
then an empty string is placed in
the result. The optional third argument is an integer which limits the
number of substrings returned.
string_split ' .' 'The quick brown fox.'
+---+-----+-----+---+
|The|quick|brown|fox|
+---+-----+-----+---+
string_split ' .,' 'The quick, brown fox.'
+---+-----++-----+---+
|The|quick||brown|fox|
+---+-----++-----+---+
The first example shows a string being broken on spaces and the period. The second is also broken on a comma and results in an empty string as one of the items of the result.
string_translate
- Class:
string manipulation operation - Usage:
string_translate C D S [O]
- See Also:
cut, cutall
The operation string_translate
is used to translate characters in
string S
based on mapping characters in C
to the corresponding ones
in D
. The optional control argument O
is a string or phrase where
'd'
deletes the characters in C
, ‘c’ complements characters by
replacing characters not in C
by the last character in D
, and 's'
translates characters in C
to those in D
but also squeezes many
occurrences to one.
string_translate 'abc' 'def' 'hello able cats'
hello dele fdts
string_translate ' ' '_' 'a whole lot of loving' 's'
a_whole_lot_of_loving
string_translate 'xz' '' 'extraneous zeal' 'd'
etraneous eal
string_translate 'xz' 'b' 'extraneous zeal' 'c'
bxbbbbbbbbbzbbb
The first example illustrates the translation of characters directly.
The second shows translation with squeezing. The third example shows the
use the 'd'
option to delete characters. Example four shows the use of
the complement option.
sublist
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A sublist B
sublist A B
- See Also:
cull, except, front, rest
The operation sublist
returns a list of items of B
chosen according
to the list of booleans given in A
, selecting those items of B
where
the corresponding item of A
is true
. If the tally of A
is not the
same as the tally of B
, it is coerced to have the same tally as B
using reshape
. If B
is not a list, the result is the same as
applying sublist
to the list of B
. The tally of the result is the
sum of A
after it has been extended, if necessary.
lolloll sublist 2 3 4 8 5 10 6
2 4 8 10 6
lo sublist 'hello world'
hlowrd
The first example shows the use of sublist
to select the items of the
list that are even numbers. The second example uses the left argument
cyclically.
Equations
shape (A sublist B) = sum (tally B reshape A)
list (A sublist B) = A sublist B
A sublist list B = A sublist B
l sublist A = list A
o sublist A = Null
sum
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Properties:
multi pervasive, reductive - Usage:
sum A
+ A
A sum B
A + B
- See Also:
plus, minus, times, divide, opposite
The operation sum
adds the items of a simple array of numbers,
reducing them to a single number that is their sum. The type of the
result is the highest type of the items. The operation is extended to
non-simple arrays by the multi pervasive mechanism. For an empty simple
array, the result is 0. The symbol sum
restricted to use on pairs.
R gets l 2 2.5 `a "abc ??error;
R OUTER + R
2 3 3.5 ?A ?A ?error
3 4 4.5 ?A ?A ?error
3.5 4.5 5. ?A ?A ?error
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?A ?A ?A ?A ?A ?A
?error ?error ?error ?A ?A ?error
sum 3. 45. 23. 18. 3.5
92.5
sum (3 4 5) (2 3 2) (0 2 4) (1 1 1)
6 10 12
sum Null
0
The first example shows the result of sum
on all combinations of types
of atoms. The second last example shows that pervasive extension of
sum
adds a list of triples in an item by item fashion. The last
example shows that the sum of an empty array is 0.
Equations
A sum B = B sum A
sum single A = EACH (sum single) A
sum EACH sum A =f= sum link A
tally link A = sum EACH tally A
symbols
The operation symbols
is used to get information on the use of names
in the workspace. If Sw
is 0, the result is a list of pairs giving the
names and roles of all the user defined names. If Sw
is 1, the result
is the similar list for both system and user names. The roles and their
meaning are as follows:
Role | Meaning |
---|---|
ident | identifier |
var | variable |
expr | expression |
op | operation |
tr | transformer |
res | reserved word |
A := count 5;
foo IS first rest
symbols 0
+-----+------+
|A var|FOO op|
+-----+------+
synonym
- Class:
syntax
A synonym is an alternate symbol or name that represents a Nial term. For example, the symbol
The list of all synonyms in Nial follows:
div | operation | divide |
---|---|---|
Falsehood, o | expression | False |
inv | operation | inverse |
ip | operation | innerproduct |
istruthvalue | operation | isboolean |
opp | operation | opposite |
prod | operation | product |
recip | operation | reciprocal |
Truth, l | expression | True |
vacate | operation | Null first |
void | operation | Null first |
+ | operation | sum |
- | operation | minus |
* | operation | product |
/ | operation | divide |
The following synonyms are available for keywords or delimiters used in the syntax rules:
[ | << |
] | >> |
:= | GETS |
{ | BEGIN |
} | END |
OPERATION | OP |
TRANSFORMER | TR |
take
- Class:
selection operation - Property:
binary - Usage:
A take B
take A B
- See Also:
drop, takeright, front
The operation take
selects a number of items from B
as indicated by
A
.
If B
is a list and A
is a non-negative integer, the result is the
list formed from taking A
items from the front of B
. If A
is
negative, it takes items from the right end of B
.
If B
is a table and A
is a pair of non-negative integers, the result
is the table formed by taking the number of rows and columns indicated
by A
from the upper left corner of B
. If one or both of the items of
A
are negative, the items are taken from the other end of the axis.
For higher dimensional arrays B
, the tally of A
must equal the
valence of B
and the result is obtained by taking from the front or
back of the extents along each axis according to the sign of the
corresponding item of A
.
In all of the above cases, if an item of abs A
is longer than the
extent along the corresponding axis in B
, the corresponding positions
in the result are filled with the type of the first item of B
. If B
is empty then the result is filled with the fault value ?fill
.
If B
is a single, the result is an array of shape abs A
, with all
its items equal to the item of B
.
2 take "Able "Baker "Charlie "Dog
Able Baker
T1 := tell 2 4
+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|
+---+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+---+
1 2 take T1
+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|
+---+---+
3 -5 take T1
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|1 0|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 0|0 0|0 0|0 0|
+---+---+---+---+---+
2 3 take single 3 5
+---+---+---+
|3 5|3 5|3 5|
+---+---+---+
|3 5|3 5|3 5|
+---+---+---+
The last example shows that taking from a single repeats the item of the single in every item of the result.
Equations
shape A take A = A
tally A = valence B and (and EACH isinteger A) ==> shape (A take B) = list abs A
valence B = 0 and (and EACH isinteger A) ==> A take B = abs A reshape B
takeright
- Class:
selection operation - Usage:
A takeright B
takeright A B
- See Also:
take, dropright, last
The operation takeright
is an obsolete operation that takes items from
the ends of extents. It is provided to retain compatibility with earlier
versions of Q’Nial.
Definition
takeright IS OPERATION A B { opposite A take B }
tally
- Class:
measurement operation - Usage:
tally A
- See Also:
shape, valence, grid, list
The operation tally
returns an integer indicating the number of items
of the array at the first level of nesting. This is called the tally of
the array. The tally of a single is 1. The tally of a list is the number
of items in it. The tally of a table is the product of the number of
rows and columns. In general, the tally of an array is the product of
its shape.
tally "abc
1
tally 3 4 5
3
tally 'hello world'
11
tally (2 3) (4 5 6)
2
tally tell 3 4
12
Definition
tally IS OPERATION A (product shape A)
Equations
tally A = first shape list A
tally shape A = valence A
tally tally A = 1
tally A reshape A = list A
tan
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
tan A
- See Also:
arctan, sin, cos, tanh
The operation tan
implements the tangent function of mathematics. It
produces the following results when applied to atoms of the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | tangent of the corresponding real |
integer | tangent of the corresponding real |
real | tangent of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
tan l -1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
1.55741 -1.55741 0.546302 ?A ?A ?error
Definition
tan IS OPERATION A (sin A divide cos A)
Equation
tan opposite A = opposite tan A
tanh
- Class:
scientific operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
tanh A
- See Also:
tan, arctan, sinh, cosh
The operation tanh
implements the hyperbolic tangent function of
mathematics. It produces the following results when applied to atoms of
the six types:
Atomic Type | Result |
---|---|
boolean | hyperbolic tangent of the corresponding real |
integer | hyperbolic tangent of the corresponding real |
real | hyperbolic tangent of angle A given in radians |
character | fault ?A |
phrase | fault ?A |
fault | argument A |
tanh l -1 0.5 `a "abc ??error
0.761594 -0.761594 0.462117 ?A ?A ?error
Definition
tanh IS OPERATION A (sinh A divide cosh A)
Equations
tanh opposite A = opposite tanh A
team
The transformer TEAM
applies the operations of atlas f
to
corresponding items in the list of A
. There must be the same number of
items in A
as there are operations in the atlas f
. The result has
the shape of A
. If f
is an operation that is not an atlas, TEAM f
A
is the application of f
to A
.
TEAM [+,*,max,min] (3 2)(4 5)(2 3 4)(2 3 4)
5 20 4 2
TEAM [+,*,max,min] count 2 2
2 2
2 2
TEAM second count 5
2
tell
- Class:
array generation operation - Usage:
tell A
- See Also:
count, gage, grid, cart
The operation tell
is used to generate an array of addresses from a
shape. For a non-negative integer N
, it generates the list of integers
from 0 to N - 1
. For a list of non-negative integers, tell
generates
the array of all combinations of tell applied to the items of the list.
If list A
is not a shape, the result is the fault ?shape
.
tell 5
0 1 2 3 4
tell 3 4
+---+---+---+---+
|0 0|0 1|0 2|0 3|
+---+---+---+---+
|1 0|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+---+
|2 0|2 1|2 2|2 3|
+---+---+---+---+
The examples show tell
being applied to a shape and returning the
array of addresses.
Equations
tell shape A choose A = A
isinteger A or isshape A ==> tell A = cart EACH tell A
N an integer and (N >= 0) ==> tell (N + 1) = (tell N append N)
tell Null = single Null
tell 0 = Null
tell 1 = solitary 0
tell solitary 1 = solitary solitary 0
third
The operation third
returns the third of the items of A
. Third
is
defined in terms of pick
and its behaviour is affected by that of
pick
. The third of a triple is its last item. The third of a table is
the third item in the list of items in row major order. The third of an
array with two or fewer items is the fault ?address
.
third 4 5 6
6
third tell 3 4
0 2
third Null
0
Definition
third IS OPERATION A { 2 pick list A }
Equation
third list A = third A
time
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Time
- See Also:
timestamp
The expression Time
returns a real number giving the time in seconds
spent in executing Q’Nial since the beginning of the session. On systems
permitting multi-processing, the time represents central processor time
in seconds.
The expression Time
is useful for estimating the relative costs of
Q’Nial operations in terms of processor time.
times
- Class:
arithmetic operation - Property:
binary pervasive - Usage:
A times B
times A B
- See Also:
product, divide, reciprocal, plus
The operation times
is the same as product
(and synonym *
) except
that it enforces the rule that it must be applied to a pair. Product
is multi pervasive and can add up any number of items.
7 times 9
63
(2 3 4) times (12 22 33)
24 66 132
times 2 3 4
?times expects a pair
timestamp
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Timestamp
- See Also:
time
The expression Timestamp
gives the current date and time in the
standard format for the host system. The details of this expression are
implementation dependent.
The result is reported as a string giving the date and time. Timestamp
is useful for dating reports and messages.
Timestamp
Mon Jan 27 14:07:37 1997
toend
The command toend
is used in debugging a definition that has been
suspended using Break or <Ctrl B>. The effect of toend
is to execute
all the expressions to the end of the current loop or the end of the
definition. If there is a loop then execution suspends on the expression
following the loop. If the toend
is issued when not in a loop,
execution suspends on the expression being returned from the definition.
tolower
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
tolower A
- See Also:
toupper, tonumber, char, charrep, phrase, string
The operation tolower
is used to ensure that a string has all its
letters in lower case. Applied to a string A
, it results in a string
with all the upper case letters converted to lower case leaving all
other characters unchanged. It can also be used on a single character.
tolower 'abcDE*?12xyZ'
abcde*?12xyz
tolower 'STATEMENT IN LOWER CASE'
statement in lower case
tonumber
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
tonumber A
- See Also:
tolower, toupper, execute, char, charrep, string
The operation tonumber
converts the string A
holding a character
representation of a number to its corresponding numeric representation.
tonumber '345'
345
tonumber '37.456'
37.456
tonumber '123456789012345'
1.23457e+14
tonumber 'l'
l
tonumber '"abc'
?not a number
Equation
Numstr a string representing a number ==> tostring Numstr = execute Numstr
top level loop
Nial program fragments are entered during interactive input with a
process called the top level loop ; or brought into the system under
the control of a systems operation, loaddefs
. This systems operation
has the effect of loading a sequence of program fragments from a file as
though the fragments had been entered interactively in the order they
appear in the file.
The global environment is the collection of associations between names and meanings that are known at the top level loop. Such names have global scope in that they can be referenced by any program text. All other names have a local scope that associates a meaning with the name only during execution of a specific portion of a program text.
In direct input at the top level loop, a remark ends at the end of the line unless a backslash symbol ( \ ) is used to extend the line. In a definition file, a remark ends at the first blank line. A remark cannot appear within a definition or expression-sequence.
The expressions in an expression-sequence are evaluated in left-to-right
order. If the sequence does not terminate with a semicolon, the array
returned is the result of the last expression. If the sequence does end
with a semicolon, the array returned is the fault ?noexpr
. At the top
level loop, if the array returned is the fault ?noexpr
, it is not
displayed.
In window mode for a console version of Q’Nial when a window is used
interactively from the top level loop, the terminal acts as though it
has a screen the size of the window. In particular, as the cursor
attempts to move below the bottom line of the window, the text is
scrolled one line at a time. The speed of scrolling can be changed using
the operation setscroll
.
toraw
- Class:
conversion operation - Usage:
toraw A
- See Also:
fromraw, tonumber
The operation toraw
converts the simple array A
of real number,
integers, or characters to a boolean array corresponding to the internal
bit pattern for the data.
toraw 'abc'
olloooololloooloolloooll
toraw 345
ooooooooooooooooooooooololollool
toraw 34.5
olooooooolooooololoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
toraw lollo
lollo
Equation
simple A and and (type A match type first A) => A = fromraw (toraw A) (first A)
toupper
The operation toupper
is used to ensure that a string has all its
letters in upper case. Applied to a string A
, it results in a string
with all the lower case letters converted to upper case leaving all
other characters unchanged. It can also be used on a single character.
toupper 'abcDE*?12xyZ'
ABCDE*?12XYZ
toupper 'a statement in upper case'
A STATEMENT IN UPPER CASE
transformer
- Class:
concept - See Also:
expression, operation, definition
A transformer is a functional object that is used to construct a new operation from a given operation argument, usually producing a modified version of the given operation. Most transformers used in Nial are provided in the core language. However, there is a mechanism that constructs a named transformer in terms of one or more operation parameters. A user-defined transformer describes the modified operation as a parameterized algorithm for manipulating data.
A transformer usually specifies a general algorithm which can have an
operation as a parameter. For example, the EACH
family of transformers
generalizes a number of looping mechanisms for applying an operation to
items of arrays.
A user-defined transformer could provide the skeleton for processing the records of a file and allow an arbitrary operation to be applied to each record. Such a transformer is often called a filter.
The process of evaluating an operation call of an operation modified by a transformer requires two steps. The modified operation is formed; and then the modified operation is given the array argument which it uses to produce the result.
TWICE is TRANSFORMER f (f f)
TWICE rest 4 5 6 7 8
6 7 8
transformer form
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
transformer, definition
A transformer-form is the syntactic structure used to describe a transformer in terms of an operation expression involving formal operation parameters. The names that follow the keyword transformer in the transformer-form are called formal operation parameters. The body of a transformer-form is the operation-expression which uses these names. The first rule requires that the operation-expression be an operation-form; the second allows any operation- expression to be used.
transformer-form ::= TRANSFORMER
{ identifier }+ operation-form
| TRANSFORMER { identifier }+
( operation-expression )
The effect of applying a transformer-form to an operation-expression is the effect of an operation formed in the body of the transformer, such that wherever one of the formal operation parameters occurs, it is replaced with the corresponding argument operation-expression.
On the other hand, if the formal operation parameters consist of only one name, the operation formed is associated with the argument operation-expression. If the operation formed has two or more names, the operation-expression must denote an atlas of the same length; and the formal operation parameters are associated with the operations of the atlas in their sequence.
The associations are made with the argument operation-expression in the
environment where the transformer is applied. If there is a mismatch
between the number of formal operation parameters and the argument, the
result of applying the transform is the fault ?tr_parameter
.
transpose
- Class:
data rearrangement operation - Usage:
transpose A
- See Also:
fuse, reverse, pack
The operation transpose
is used to reverse the axes of a table or
array of higher valence. If A
is an M
by N
table, the transpose is
the N
by M
table whose rows are the columns of A
. Transpose
has
no effect on a single or a list.
transpose tell 2 3
+---+---+
|0 0|1 0|
+---+---+
|0 1|1 1|
+---+---+
|0 2|1 2|
+---+---+
A := 2 3 4 reshape count 24
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24
transpose A
1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16
5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20
9 21 10 22 11 23 12 24
Definition
transpose IS OPERATION A ( reverse tell valence A fuse A)
Equations
shape transpose A = reverse shape A
transpose A = reverse axes A fuse A
transpose transpose A = A
transpose single A = single A
transpose list A = list A
trs
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Trs
- See Also:
symbols, exprs, ops, vars
The expression Trs
returns a list of phrases giving the names of all
user defined transformers in the workspace.
Definition
Trs IS {
Names Roles := pack symbols 0;
"tr match Roles sublist Names }
true
- Class:
constant expression - Usage:
True
- See Also:
false, isboolean
The constant expression True
denotes the boolean atom for true
,
which Nial also denotes by l
. It is the result of comparing two
identical arrays for equality.
Definition
True IS (0 equal 0)
Equations
tally True = 1
shape True = Null
single True = True
not True = False
max True = True
abs True = 1
twig
- Class:
distributive transformer - Usage:
TWIG f A
- See Also:
leaf, each
The transformer TWIG
transforms an operation f
into an operation
that applies f
to every simple array in the nested structure of A
.
The resulting operation is called the TWIG
transform of f
. The
result of applying the TWIG
transform of f
to A
has the same shape
as A
. If f
maps simple arrays to simple arrays of the same shape,
the result has the same structure as A
.
T1 := count 2 3
+---+---+---+
|1 1|1 2|1 3|
+---+---+---+
|2 1|2 2|2 3|
+---+---+---+
TWIG tally T1
2 2 2
2 2 2
TWIG tell T1
+-----+---------+-------------+
|+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
||0 0|||0 0|0 1|||0 0|0 1|0 2||
|+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
+-----+---------+-------------+
|+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
||0 0|||0 0|0 1|||0 0|0 1|0 2||
|+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
||1 0|||1 0|1 1|||1 0|1 1|1 2||
|+---+|+---+---+|+---+---+---+|
+-----+---------+-------------+
The first example shows that the result of applying a TWIG
transform
to a table is a table of the same shape. The items of T1
are simple
and hence have been mapped by tally to 2. In the second example, the
structure of the result is not preserved because tell
maps a pair to a
table of pairs.
Definition
TWIG IS TRANSFORMER f OPERATION A {
IF simple A THEN
f A
ELSE
EACH (TWIG f) A
ENDIF }
Equations
shape TWIG f A = shape A
f unary pervasive ==> TWIG f A = f A
(TWIG f) (TWIG g) A = TWIG (f g) A
TWIG f list A = list TWIG f A
A is a shape ==> TWIG f (A reshape B) = A reshape TWIG f B
type
- Class:
measurement operation - Property:
unary pervasive - Usage:
type A
- See Also:
isboolean
The operation type
maps an atom A
to the representative value of the
corresponding atomic type. It is extended to arbitrary arrays by being
unary pervasive.
Atomic type | Representative atom |
---|---|
boolean | o |
integer | 0 |
real | 0. |
character | <blank> |
phrase | ” |
fault | ? |
set "decor;
type l 3 3.3 `3 '3.3' "33
+-+-+--+--+-----+--+
|o|0|0.|` |' '|""|
+-+-+--+--+-----+--+
The operation type
is provided as a computational way of transforming
an array to a standard value, while preserving structure and type
information. Executing a type test predicate, isboolean
, isinteger ,
etc., is equivalent to testing that the type of an array is equal to the
corresponding representative atom.
unary pervasive
- Class:
operation property - Usage:
f A
- See Also:
binary pervasive, multi pervasive, pervasive, each
A unary pervasive operation maps an array to another array with identical structure, mapping each atom by the function’s behaviour on atoms. All of the scientific operations and the unary operations of arithmetic and logic are unary pervasive.
The scientific operations are implemented using the library routines provided with the C compiler used to construct Q’Nial. The accuracy of the result is determined by the precision of the floating point number system of the computer and the accuracy of the library routine approximation.
The following table describes the unary pervasive operations:
Operation | Function |
---|---|
abs | absolute value |
arccos | inverse cosine function |
arcsin | inverse sine function |
arctan | inverse tangent function |
ceiling | lowest integer above a real number |
char | integer to character conversion |
charrep | character to integer conversion |
cos | cosine function |
cosh | hyperbolic cosine function |
exp | exponential function |
floor | next higher integer above a real number |
ln | natural logarithm |
log | logarithm base 10 |
not | opposite of a boolean value |
opposite | opposite of a number |
reciprocal | reciprocal of a number |
sin | sine function |
sinh | hyperbolic sine function |
sqrt | square root of a number |
tan | tangent function |
tanh | hyperbolic tangent function |
type | representative atom of same type |
Equations
f A = EACH f A
shape f A = shape A
unequal
- Class:
logic operation - Property:
predicate - Usage:
A unequal B
A ~= B
unequal A
- See Also:
equal, diverse, notin
The operation
2 3 4 ~= [2,3,4]
o
Null ~= ''
o
2 (3 4) ~= (2 3) 4
l
unequal (2 3) (2 3) (2 3)
o
Definition
unequal IS OPERATION A { not equal A }
up
- Class:
comparison operation - Properties:
binary, predicate - Usage:
A up B
up A B
- See Also:
lte
The operation up
is used to do a lexicographic comparison of two
arrays returning true
if A
is lexicographically less than or equal
to B
and false
otherwise. If A
and B
are atoms of the same type,
then their values are compared using <=
, otherwise A
is viewed as
less than B
if A
has a lower type than B
. The types are ordered
lowest to highest by boolean
, integer, real, character, phrase , and
fault
.
If one of A
and B
is not atomic then the list of items of A
are
compared lexicographically to those of B
. The comparison is based on
the first position where the items differ, and the result is the
lexicographic comparison of the two items. If the lists of items agree
up to the point where one is exhausted, then the array with the shorter
list precedes the longer one.
If A
and B
are arrays with the same list of items, then the
comparison is decided by comparing their shapes lexicographically.
2 up 1.5
l
[2] up 3
1
5 up 3 4 5
o
tell 10 up tell 2 3
l
(2 2 reshape 'abcd') up (1 4 reshape 'abcd')
o
The first example indicates that 2 precedes 1.5 because the two atoms
are of different type and type integer precedes type real. The second
example is true
because the lists of items differ in the first item,
and 2 precedes 3. In the third example the lists of items differ in the
first item and 5 does not precede 3. In the fourth example, the arrays
differ in the first item and the up
comparison of 0 and 0 0 is true
because they agree in the first item and 0 is shorter. In the final
example, the result is false
because the items are the same and the
up
comparison of 2 2 and 1 4 is false
.
Equations
(A up B) and (A ~= B) ==> not (B up A)
A = B ==> A up B
(A up B) and (B up A) <==> A = B
Definitions
sortup IS SORT up
gradeup IS GRADE up
update
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
update Nm I A
- See Also:
updateall, deepupdate, place
The operation update
provides the semantics of the Nm@I := A
form of
assignment expression. Nm
must be an existing variable represented by
a string, phrase or a cast. I
is the address of the location to be
updated. A
is the array to be placed in the variable.
X := 3 4 5; update "X 0 8
8 4 5
update !X 2 "goodbye
8 4 goodbye
The major purpose of update
is to allow a selective update at one
location in the array associated with a global variable without forcing
a copy. By passing the name of the variable to the operation that is
using update
, rather than its value, no sharing of the internal data
is made and hence the update can be done in place.
updateall
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
updateall Nm I A
- See Also:
update, deepupdate, placeall
The operation updateall
provides the semantics of the Nm#I := A
form
of assignment expression. Nm
must be an existing variable represented
by a string, phrase or a cast. I
is the array of addresses of the
locations to be updated. A
is the array of values to be placed in the
variable.
X := 3 4 5;
updateall "X (0 2) (8 10)
8 4 10
updateall !X (1 2) ("hello "goodbye)
8 hello goodbye
The major purpose of updateall
is to allow a selective update at
several locations in the array associated with a global variable without
forcing a copy. By passing the name of the variable to the operation
that is using update
, rather than its value, no sharing of the
internal data is made, and hence the update can be done in place.
throw
- Class:
control flow operation - Usage:
throw A
- See Also:
catch
The control flow operation throw
is used to interrupt the execution of
a function and return a value as the result of a function call invoked
with the tranformer CATCH
. The catch-throw mechanism provides a way to
gracefully exit a computation when an unexpected occurence is
encountered. The value thrown to the point where CATCH
was invokded
can be used to provide a default value or to signal an specific error
condition using a fault.
The CATCH-throw mechanism was added in Version 7 of Q’Nial to provide a dynamic mechanism for changing the flow of control when an exceptional situation is encountered.
vacate
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
vacate A
- See Also:
reshape, void
The operation vacate
is a renaming of the operation (0 reshape)
. It
is used in Version 4 of Array Theory to produce an empty array with the
same prototype as its argument. In Version 6 of Array Theory it always
returns Null
.
vacate 3 (4 5)= Null
l
Definition
vacate is OPERATION A ( 0 reshape A )
Equations
vacate A = Null
vacate A = void first A
valence
- Class:
measurement operation - Usage:
valence A
- See Also:
shape, tally
The operation valence
returns an integer indicating the number of axes
of A
. If A
is a single, list or table, the result is 0, 1 or 2
respectively.
valence 3
0
valence 4 5 6
1
valence tell 2 3
2
valence (0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 reshape 3)
8
Definition
valence IS OPERATION A (tally shape A)
Equations
shape valence A = Null
tally valence A = 1
value
- Class:
evaluation operation - Usage:
value Nm
- See Also:
assign, eval
The operation value
provides the semantics of value of a variable
that is implicit whenever a variable is used in a value context. The
argument Nm
is either a string or phrase denoting a variable or it is
the cast of a variable. The result is the value of the variable. If Nm
is a string or phrase, the value is sought in the environment at the
point of application of value
. If Nm
is a cast, the value is sought
in the environment where the cast was created. The major use of value
is in conjunction with assign
which allows arbitrary variables to be
stored and later retrieved using value
.
X := 3 4 5 ; value "X = value !X
l
variable
- Class:
syntax - See Also:
assign expression, local environment, vars, role, indexing, scope of a variable
A variable is a name associated with an array value. Its syntactic form is that of an identifier.
variable ::= identifier
indexed-variable ::=
variable @ primary-expression
| variable @@ primary-expression
| variable # primary-expression
| variable | primary-expression
A variable is given an association with an array value by its use on the left side of an assign-expression, its appearance in a local or nonlocal declaration, its designation as a variable in an external-declaration or its use as the first argument of the operation assign.
When a variable is used as a primary-expression, its meaning is the
array value associated with the identifier. If the variable exists but
has not been assigned, it will have as its default value the fault
?no_value
. If an identifier is mentioned as a primary-expression but
has not yet been given an association, a parse error will occur with the
fault ?undefined identifier:
.
Role of a Variable
A variable gives a name to the result of a computation. If the same result is needed later in the program, the named variable can be used, thereby avoiding the necessity of repeating the computation. A variable can be assigned different array values throughout the computation.
Although an identifier can be of any length up to 80 characters, a compromise is usually made between choosing explicit variable names and choosing brief names to avoid unnecessary typing. An identifier used as a variable cannot be a Q’Nial reserved word. In a local environment, a variable identifier can be chosen the same as a predefined or user-defined global definition name. Such a choice makes the global use of the name unavailable in the local context.
In any context, an identifier can name only one of: a variable, an array- expression, an operation-expression, or a transformer-expression. During one session, the role of a name, i.e. the class of syntactic object it names, cannot be changed.
Indexed Variable
An indexed variable is a variable for which a part of the associated array value is referenced. An index is the value of the primary-expression within an indexed-variable which specifies the location or locations of the part or parts of the array that are selected.
vars
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Vars
- See Also:
symbols, exprs, ops, trs
The expression Vars
returns a list of phrases giving the names of all
user variables in the workspace.
Definition
Vars IS {
Names Roles := pack symbols 0;
"var match Roles sublist Names }
void
- Class:
reshaping operation - Usage:
void A
- See Also:
reshape, vacate
The operation void
is an obsolete operation that has the same effect
as the operation (0 reshape)
. It is used in Version 4 of Array Theory
to produce an empty array with A as its prototype. In Version 6 of Array
Theory it always returns Null
.
void 3 (4 5) = Null
l
Definition
void is OPERATION A ( 0 reshape solitary A )
Equations
void A = Null
vacate A = void first A
watch
- Class:
system operation - Usage:
watch Var Expr
- See Also:
debugging, watchlist
The operation watch
provides a means to watch when a variable has its
value changed. The first argument to watch
is a variable reference
expressed as a cast. For a global variable X
, the cast is !X
; for a
local variable Y
in definition G
, the cast is !G:Y
.
The second argument is a string of program text to be executed when the variable is changed. If it is empty then it indicates that the watch should be removed. The program text can display the value being set, execute a break, or take some other action.
The result of watch
is the variable reference and the previous watch
expression if any. This can be used to restore the watch setting by
storing it and using it as the argument to watch
at a later time.
X gets count 5;
watch !x 'write ''X changed to: '' X'
+------------------++
|+---+------------+||
||100|2 7926 42354|||
|+---+------------+||
+------------------++
X gets 'abc'
+--------------+---+
|X changed to: |abc|
+--------------+---+
abc
X gets 3 4 5 6
+--------------+-------+
|X changed to: |3 4 5 6|
+--------------+-------+
3 4 5 6
foo is op A { B gets count A; reverse B }
watch !foo:b 'write ''B in foo changed to: '' B'
+--------------------------------------++
|+---+--------------------------------+||
||100|+--+------------+--------------+|||
|| ||50|2 7926 42470|23 7798 7798 B||||
|| |+--+------------+--------------+|||
|+---+--------------------------------+||
+--------------------------------------++
watchlist
+-----------------------------+----------------------------------------+
|+--+------------------------+|+------+-------------------------------+|
||!X|write 'X changed to: ' X|||!FOO:B|write 'B in foo changed to: ' B||
|+--+------------------------+|+------+-------------------------------+|
+-----------------------------+----------------------------------------+
watch !x ''
+------------------+------------------------+
|+---+------------+|write 'X changed to: ' X|
||100|2 7926 42354|| |
|+---+------------+| |
+------------------+------------------------+
watchlist
+----------------------------------------+
|+------+-------------------------------+|
||!FOO:B|write 'B in foo changed to: ' B||
|+------+-------------------------------+|
+----------------------------------------+
To clear all watches use:
EACH first Watchlist EACHLEFT watch ''
watchlist
- Class:
system expression - Usage:
Watchlist
- See Also:
watch, debugging
The execution of Watchlist
prints out a list of the variable watches
that are in effect.
Its main use is to assist in clearing the watches as debugging proceeds.
Watchlist
+-----------------------------+----------------------------------------+
|+--+------------------------+|+------+-------------------------------+|
||!X|write 'X changed to: ' X|||!FOO:B|write 'B in foo changed to: ' B||
|+--+------------------------+|+------+-------------------------------+|
+-----------------------------+----------------------------------------+
watch !x ''
+------------------+------------------------+
|+---+------------+|write 'X changed to: ' X|
||100|2 7926 42354|| |
|+---+------------+| |
+------------------+------------------------+
watchlist
+----------------------------------------+
|+------+-------------------------------+|
||!FOO:B|write 'B in foo changed to: ' B||
|+------+-------------------------------+|
+----------------------------------------+
To clear all watches use:
EACH first Watchlist EACHLEFT watch ''
while-loop
- Class:
control structure - Usage:
WHILE conditional expression DO expression sequence ENDWHILE
- See Also:
repeat-loop, for-loop
The WHILE-loop
notation is used for executing an expression sequence
repeatedly as long as a conditional expression returns true
.
F := open Filenm "r;
Lines := '';
Line := readfile F;
WHILE not isfault Line DO
Lines := Lines append Line;
Line := readfile F;
ENDWHILE;
write
- Class:
interactive input/output operation - Usage:
write A
- See Also:
writescreen, writechars, read
The operation write
displays the picture of an array on the display
screen. The result is the no-expression fault ?noexpr
. The picture
displayed depends on the settings of the diagram/sketch
and
decor/nodecor
switches. The effect of write
is the same as applying
writescreen
to the picture of the array.
write 3 (4 5);
+-+---+
|3|4 5|
+-+---+
Definition
write IS OPERATION A { writescreen picture A }
writearray
- Class:
nial direct access file operation - Usage:
writearray F N A
- See Also:
writerecord, readarray, readrecord, eraserecord, writefile, filetally, open, close
The operation writearray
writes array A
to the direct access file
designated by F
at component number N
. If a component already exists
at that component number and A
can fit in the space taken by that
component, the existing one is overwritten. If not, the new component is
written at the end of the .rec
file and the .ndx
file is updated to
indicate the starting point for the new component. The space used by the
previous value is recorded for a future compression.
The second argument N
can be a list of numbers, in which case the
items of A
are written to the components designated by the integers in
N
. The file must be open for direct access. The other direct access
file operations, readrecord
and writerecord
, must not be used on a
file that is created using writearray
. However, eraserecord
and
filetally
are used for both kinds of direct access files.
After a writearray
or writerecord
, if the total unused space is a
significant amount of the space occupied by the .rec
file, the file is
compressed with the records being placed in order.
The content of an array component is placed in the file in a binary form independent of the workspace in which it was created. Data that is written to a direct access file, erased, and then read in again, may take up more space in the workspace after this process due to lack of sharing of internal representations.
writechars
- Class:
interactive input/output operation - Usage:
writechars S
- See Also:
writescreen, write
The operation writechars
writes S
to the screen at the current
cursor position, without supplying a trailing “new line” character.
Thus, the cursor is left at the position just after the text. S
may be
a string, a phrase or a single character. The principal use of
writechars
is in applications where the display screen is managed as a
fixed object and scrolling must be avoided.
writechars 'hello world'
writefield
- Class:
host direct access file operation - Usage:
writefield Filename Start Str
- See Also:
readfield, filelength, writerecord, writearray
The operation writefield
is used to write a character string to a
portion of an existing host file. The first argument is the file name,
followed by the integer offset to the beginning of the field to be
written and by the string to be written. The result is the ?noexpr
fault.
Example
writefield "phonefile 200 'Mike Smith 389-4444'
In the example, writefield
overwrites the contents of file phonefile
starting at position 200 by the string given as the third argument.
writefile
- Class:
file operation - Usage:
writefile N S
writefile N S [Eolsw]
- See Also:
readfile, putfile, open, close, appendfile
The operation writefile
is used to write the character array S
to
the file designated by file designator N
. The file designator is an
integer returned by open
. The file must have been opened for writing,
appending or communication.
The argument S
may be a character, a string, or an array of characters
of any valence. If it is a character or string, a single record is
written to the file. If it is a table, the rows of the table are written
as records to the file. The appropriate end-of-line indication is added
for each record written. If the argument S
is empty, an empty record
is written.
If writefile
is successful, the result is the no-expression fault
?noexpr
. If the argument is not a character, string or character
table, the fault ?not text data
is returned.
If the optional third argument is present, it is used to indicate
whether the end-of-line indication should be written. If the third
argument is o
or 0
the indication is omitted; if it is l
or 1
,
the indication is placed in the file. This form of writefile
is used
in communications mode to send information to a device driver on the
EXTDOS version.
writefile 5 'a line of text';
writerecord
- Class:
nial direct access file operation - Usage:
writerecord F N S
- See Also:
readrecord, writearray, readarray, eraserecord, open, close
The operation writerecord
writes string S
to the direct access file
designated by F
at component number N
.
If a component already exists at that component number and S
can fit
in the space taken by that component, the existing one is overwritten.
If not, the new component is written at the end of the .rec
file and
the .ndx
file is updated to indicate the starting point for the new
component.
The second argument N
can be a list of numbers, in which case the
items of S
must be strings and are written to the components
designated by the integers in N
. The file must be open for direct
access. The other direct access file operations, readarray
and
writearray
, must not be used on a file that is created using
writerecord
. However, eraserecord
and filetally
are used for both
kinds of direct access files.
The data written in the .rec
file by writerecord
does not contain
any end-of-line indications unless they explicitly are part of the
strings being written.
writescreen
- Class:
interactive input/output operation - Usage:
writescreen S
- See Also:
write, writechars, writefile, readscreen
The operation writescreen
is used to write character data to the
display screen. The argument S
may be a character, a string, or a
character table. If it is a character or string, a single line is
displayed. If it is a table, the rows of the table are written as lines.
If the argument S
is empty, an empty line is displayed. In window
mode, the data is written within the bounds of the active window.
The result of the operation is the no-expression fault ?noexpr
. If the
argument is not a character, string or character table, the fault ?not
text data
is returned.
After the text is displayed, the cursor is placed on the line following the last line written.
writescreen 'End of Manual' ;
The operation writescreen
is similar to the operation writefile
. For
most host systems, writefile
may be used with the standard output
device
to get the same effect as a writescreen
. The argument S
may
be a character, a string, or a character table.